This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

BooksAudiobooksComicsSheet Music### Categories

### Categories

### Categories

Editors' Picks Books

Hand-picked favorites from

our editors

our editors

Editors' Picks Audiobooks

Hand-picked favorites from

our editors

our editors

Editors' Picks Comics

Hand-picked favorites from

our editors

our editors

Editors' Picks Sheet Music

Hand-picked favorites from

our editors

our editors

Top Books

What's trending, bestsellers,

award-winners & more

award-winners & more

Top Audiobooks

What's trending, bestsellers,

award-winners & more

award-winners & more

Top Comics

What's trending, bestsellers,

award-winners & more

award-winners & more

Top Sheet Music

What's trending, bestsellers,

award-winners & more

award-winners & more

Welcome to Scribd! Start your free trial and access books, documents and more.Find out more

UNIT 2

MECHANICAL VIBRATION

J.M. KRODKIEWSKI 2008

THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE Department of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering

. 1

2

MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS Copyright C 2008 by J.M. Krodkiewski

The University of Melbourne Department of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering

CONTENTS

0.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

I

MODELLING AND ANALYSIS

7

1 MECHANICAL VIBRATION OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM LINEAR SYSTEMS 9 1.1 MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM . . . . 1.1.1 Physical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Mathematical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 1.2.1 Free vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 1.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 12 16 28 28 34 44

Forced vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 MECHANICAL VIBRATION OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM LINEAR SYSTEMS 66 2.1 MODELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.1.1 Physical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 2.1.2 Mathematical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 2.1.3 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.2 ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM . . . . . 93 2.2.1 General case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.2.2 Modal analysis - case of small damping . . . . . . . . . . 102 2.2.3 Kinetic and potential energy functions - Dissipation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 2.2.4 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 2.3 ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 2.3.1 Balancing of rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 2.3.2 Dynamic absorber of vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 3 VIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 162 3.1 MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 3.1.1 Modelling of strings, rods and shafts . . . . . . . . . . . 162 3.1.2 Modelling of beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

CONTENTS

4

3.2 ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS . . . . . 3.2.1 Free vibration of strings, rods and shafts 3.2.2 Free vibrations of beams . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 3.3.1 Rigid Elements Method. . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Finite Elements Method. . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 CONDENSATION OF THE DISCREET SYSTEMS 3.5.1 Condensation of the inertia matrix. . . . 3.5.2 Condensation of the damping matrix. . . 3.5.3 Condensation of the stiﬀness matrix. . . 3.5.4 Condensation of the external forces. . . . 3.6 PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168 168 174 182 214 214 217 225 226 227 228 228 228 229

II

EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION

237

4 MODAL ANALYSIS OF A SYSTEM WITH 3 DEGREES OF FREEDOM 238 4.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE LABORATORY INSTALLATION . . . . . 238 4.2 MODELLING OF THE OBJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 4.2.1 Physical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 4.2.2 Mathematical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 4.3 ANALYSIS OF THE MATHEMATICAL MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . 241 4.3.1 Natural frequencies and natural modes of the undamped system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 4.3.2 Equations of motion in terms of the normal coordinates - transfer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 4.3.3 Extraction of the natural frequencies and the natural modes from the transfer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 4.4 EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 4.4.1 Acquiring of the physical model initial parameters . . 243 4.4.2 Measurements of the transfer functions . . . . . . . . . . 244 4.4.3 Identiﬁcation of the physical model parameters . . . . 245 4.5 WORKSHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

is devoted to this solution of these engineering problems that can be approximated by means of the linear models. two the most important. One of them is devoted to the experimental determination of the natural modes and the corresponding natural frequencies of a Multi-Degree-Of-Freedom- . Solution to some of them are provided.INTRODUCTION. Part one consists of four chapters. Part two gives the theoretical background and description of the laboratory experiments. Chapter three. Employment of these matrices to the solution of the engineering problems is demonstrated on a number of examples. The presented condensation techniques allow to keep size of the discrete mathematical model on a reasonably low level. This chapter forms a base for development of discretization methods presented in the next chapter In chapter four. as a part of the second year subject Mechanics 1. Dynamic balancing of the rotating elements and the passive control of vibrations by means of the dynamic absorber of vibrations illustrate application of the theory presented to the engineering problems. The ﬁrst chapter. 5 0. and beams. The natural frequencies and the natural modes are used for the exact solutions of the free and forced vibrations. Application of the modal analysis to the case of the small structural damping results in solution of the initial problem and the forced response. Modelling and Analysis. rods. students should study it in their own time. Chapter two is devoted to modeling and analysis of these mechanical systems that can be approximated by means of the Multi-Degree-Of-Freedom models. In the general case of damping the process of looking for the natural frequencies and the system forced response is provided. shafts. Information included in this chapter. Mechanical Vibration of One-Degree-Of-Freedom Linear System.1 INTRODUCTION. describes the laboratory work recommended for this course. The purpose of this text is to provide the students with the theoretical background and engineering applications of the theory of vibrations of mechanical systems. illustrates modelling and analysis of these engineering problems that can be approximated by means of the one degree of freedom system. The considerations are limited to the linear system only. It is divided into two parts. However. for engineering applications. methods of approximation of the continuous systems by the discrete models are presented. Part one. is concerned with the problems of vibration associated with one-dimensional continuous systems such as string. Solution to the other problems should be produced by students during tutorials and in their own time. Approximation of the Continuous Systems by Discrete Models. Vibration of Continuous Systems. The Newton’s-Euler’s approach. where already conveyed to the students and are not to be lectured during this course. Each chapter is supplied with several engineering problems. Lagrange’s equations and the inﬂuence coeﬃcients method are utilized for the purpose of creation of the mathematical model. Experimental Investigation. The Rigid Element Method and the Final Element Method are explained and utilized to produce the inertia and stiﬀness matrices of the free-free beam. The second part. since this knowledge is essential for a proper understanding of the following material.

.INTRODUCTION. The other demonstrates the balancing techniques. 6 System.

Part I MODELLING AND ANALYSIS 7 .

Therefore it is necessary to introduce many assumptions that simplify the engineering problems to such extend that the physic laws may be applied. This part deals with study of linear vibrations of mechanical system. This part of modelling is called creation of the physical model. Such a type of motion is called vibration. One of the most frequently encounter in engineering type of motion is the oscillatory motion of a mechanical system about its equilibrium position. Process of solving of the mathematical model is called analysis and yields solution to the problem considered. Application of the physics law to the physical model yields the wanted mathematical description that is called mathematical model. These laws can not be directly applied to the real system. This mathematical description can be obtained by taking advantage of the known laws of physics.8 Modelling is the part of solution of an engineering problems that aims towards producing its mathematical description. .

i 2 1 xi t Figure 1 . If the body is forced out from its equilibrium position and then it is released. each point of the system performs an independent oscillatory motion. one has to introduce an inﬁnite number of independent coordinates xi to determine uniquely its motion. Therefore it is necessary to introduce many assumptions that simplify the problem to such an extend that the physic laws may by apply. Application of the physics law to the physical model yields the wanted mathematical description which is called mathematical model. 1. 1. This part of modelling is called creation of the physical model. 1. Therefore.Chapter 1 MECHANICAL VIBRATION OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM LINEAR SYSTEMS DEFINITION: Any oscillatory motion of a mechanical system about its equilibrium position is called vibration. These lows can not be directly applied to the real system.1 Physical model As an example of vibration let us consider the vertical motion of the body 1 suspended on the rod 2 shown in Fig. The mathematical description of the engineering problem one can obtain by taking advantage of the known lows of physics. in general.1 MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM DEFINITION: Modelling is the part of solution of an engineering problem that aims for producing its mathematical description.1.

if one assume that the rod 2 is massless and the body 1 is rigid. in many cases. 2). The following analysis will be restricted to system with one degree of freedom only. only one coordinate is suﬃcient to determine uniquely the whole system. its instantaneous position as a function of x is shown in Fig. R 1 x t G Figure 3 The gravity force is denoted by G whereas the force R represents so called restoring force. 3. i xi 2 1 x t x Figure 2 Position xi of all the other points of our system depends on x. In a general case.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 10 DEFINITION: The number of independent coordinates one has to use to determine the position of a mechanical system is called number of degrees of freedom According to this deﬁnition each real system has an inﬁnite number of degrees of freedom. For example. To produce the equation of the vibration of the body 1. In the case considered the free body diagram is shown in Fig. If the rod is uniform. The displacement x of the rigid body 1 can be chosen as the independent coordinate (see Fig. may results in reduction of this number of degrees of freedom. Adaptation of certain assumptions. the restoring force R is a non-linear function of . one has to produce its free body diagram. 2.

1) The ﬁrst term represents the system elasticity and the second one reﬂects the system’s ability for dissipation of energy. R=R(x.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 11 the displacement x and the instantaneous velocity x of the body 1 (R = R(x. The future analysis will be limited to cases for which such a linearization is acceptable form the engineering point of view. k is called stiﬀness and c is called coeﬃcient of damping. x)). x) ≈ kx + cx ˙ ˙ (1. ˙ R R a) b) 0 x 0 . 5. Result of this part of modelling is called physical model. shown in Fig. 4a) and b) respectively. The physical model that reﬂects all the above mention assumption is called one-degree-of-freedom linear system. the non-linear relationship. Such cases usually are refer to as linear vibration and the system considered is call linear system. ˙ ˙ The relationship between the restoring force R and the elongation x as well as the velocity x is shown in Fig. For presentation of the physical model we use symbols shown in the Fig. x Figure 4 If it is possible to limit the consideration to vibration within a small vicinity of the system equilibrium position. . 4 can be linearized.

The creation of the physical model. 6. massless damper of damping coefficient c (angular motion) Figure 5 1. J. This mathematical model can be obtained by application of the known physic lows to the adopted physical model. Let us consider system shown in Fig.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM x rigid block of mass m (linear motion) m m. In this section principle of producing of the mathematical model for the one-degree-of-freedom system is shown. . has been explained in the previous section.2 Mathematical model To analyze motion of a system it is necessary to develop a mathematical description that approximates its dynamic behavior. second moment of area J and Young modulus E k massless spring of stifness k (angular motion) ϕ massless damper of damping coefficient c (linear motion) c c ϕ . E massless spring of stifness k (linear motion) massless beam area A.I rigid body of mass m and moment of inertia I (angular motion) 12 ϕ particle of of mass m m k A. This mathematical description is referred to as the mathematical model.1.

This increment is called restoring force. The resultant force of all static forces (in the example considered gravity force mg and interaction force due to the static elongation of spring kxs ) is equal to zero. Therefore. the restoring force has the same direction as axis x. 7) by a distance x. If the system is out of the equilibrium position (see Fig. To develop the mathematical model we take advantage of Newton’s generalized equations. the restoring force is opposite to the positive direction of axis x. Hence FR = +k |x| = −kx Therefore the restoring force always can be represented in the equation of motion by term FR = −kx (1. This require introduction of the absolute system of coordinates.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 13 k c x k xs m mg Figure 6 Let as assume that the system is in an equilibrium. there is an increment in the interaction force between the spring and the block. In this chapter we are assuming that the origin of the absolute system of coordinates coincides with the centre of gravity of the body while the body stays at its equilibrium position as shown in Fig. these forces do not have to be included in the Newton’s equations. Hence FR = −k |x| = −kx If x < 0.2) . 6. -k\x\=-kx k c x k xs m mg x>0 k\x\=-kx x<0 Figure 7 In our case the magnitude of the restoring force is |FR | = k |x| If x > 0.

8). This interaction ˙ force is called damping force and its absolute value is |FD | = c |x| . Hence. +c\x\=-cx .4) .3) k c x m Fex (t) Figure 9 The assumption that the system is linear allows to apply the superposition rules and add these forces together with the external force Fex (t) (see Fig. x<0 m Figure 8 Creating the equation of motion one has to take into consideration the interaction force between the damper and the block considered (see Fig. . 9). x>0 mg .5) (1. . -c\x\=-cx . the equation of motion of the block of mass m is m¨ = −kx − cx + Fex (t) x ˙ Transformation of the above equation into the standard form yields ˙ x + 2ςωn x + ω 2 x = f (t) ¨ n where (1. A very similar to the above consideration leads to conclusion that the damping force can be represented in the equation of motion by the following term ˙ FD = −cx (1.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 14 k c x k xs .

6) m m m ωn .is called damping factor or damping ratio f (t) .MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 15 k Fex (t) c . f (t) = (1. ωn = r . 2ςωn = .is called natural frequency of the undamped system ς .is called unit external excitation The equation 1.5 is known as the mathematical model of the linear vibration of the one-degree-of-freedom system.

MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 16 1.1.3 Problems Problem 1 y A k2 m k1 c Figure 10 The block of mass m (see Fig. the spring of stiﬀness k2 and the damper of damping coeﬃcient c. Produce the equation of motion of the block. The upper end of the spring k2 moves along the inertial axis y and its motion is governed by the following equation yA = a sin ωt were a is the amplitude of motion and ω is its angular frequency. 10)is restricted to move along the vertical axis. It is supported by the spring of stiﬀness k1 . .

Application of the Newton’s low results in the following equation of motion ˙ m¨ = −k2 x − k1 x + k2 y − cx x Its standard form is ˙ x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = q sin ωt ¨ n where ω2 = n k1 + k2 m 2ςωn = c m q= k2 a m (1.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 17 Solution y A k2 m k1 c x Figure 11 Let us introduce the inertial axis x in such a way that its origin coincides with the centre of gravity of the block 1 when the system is in its equilibrium position (see Fig.8) (1. 11.7) .9) (1.

Produce the formula for the period of the vertical oscillation of the cylinder. The cylindric container 2 has a radius R. 12) of mass m and radius r is plunged into a liquid of density d.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 18 Problem 2 r 1 2 R Figure 12 The cylinder 1 (see Fig. .

the hydrostatic force acting on the cylinder is reduced by ∆H = (x + z) dgπr2 Since the volume V1 must be equal to the volume V2 we have ¡ ¢ V1 = πr2 x = V2 = π R2 − r2 z Therefore (1.16) (1.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 19 Solution x r V2 G z V1 x R Figure 13 Let us introduce the inertial axis x in such a way that its origin coincides with the centre of gravity of the cylinder 1 when the system is in its equilibrium position (see Fig.12) r2 x z= 2 R − r2 Introducing the above relationship into the formula 1.10 one can get that ¶ µ 2 2 ¶ µ Rr r2 2 x x dgπr = πdg ∆H = x + 2 R − r2 R2 − r 2 According to the Newton’s law we have m¨ = −dgπ x µ R2 r 2 R2 − r 2 ¶ x (1.13) (1.11) (1. 13. If the cylinder is displaced from its equilibrium position by a distance x.14) The standard form of this equation of motion is x + ω2 x = 0 ¨ n µ 2 2 ¶ dg Rr = π m R2 − r 2 The period of the free oscillation of the cylinder is s s mπ (R2 − r2 ) 2 2π 2π m (R2 − r2 ) Tn = = = ωn Rr πdg Rr dg ω2 n where (1.10) (1.15) (1.17) .

Produce equation of motion of the disk .MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 20 Problem 3 R c G D L m 1 Figure 14 The disk 1 of mass m and radius R (see Fig. The disk can oscillate about the vertical axis and the damping is modelled by the linear damper of a damping coeﬃcient c. The elastic properties of the shaft are determined by the shear modulus G. 14) is supported by an elastic shaft of diameter D and length L.

the moment of inertia of the disk 2 4 ks = T = TTL = JG = πD G the stiﬀness of the rod ϕ L 32L JG Introduction of the above expressions into the equation 1.19) 2 1 (1.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 21 Solution R ϕ G D c L m Figure 15 Motion of the disk is governed by the generalized Newton’s equation ˙ I ϕ = −ks ϕ − cR2 ϕ ¨ where I = mR .20) (1.21) πD4 G ϕ=0 32L (1.18 yields ˙ I ϕ + cR2 ϕ + ¨ or ˙ ϕ + 2ςω n ϕ + ω 2 ϕ = 0 ¨ n where ω2 = n πD4 G 32LI 2ςωn = cR2 I (1.18) .

16) can rotate about the horizontal axis O. The spring of stiﬀness k keeps it in the horizontal position. The damping coeﬃcient c reﬂects dissipation of energy of the system. .MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 22 Problem 4 O k l b 1 c a m Figure 16 The thin and uniform plate 1 of mass m (see Fig. Produce the equation of motion of the plate.

MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 23 Solution O k l b 1 ϕ c a m Figure 17 Motion of the plate along the coordinate ϕ (see Fig.27) mb2 ϕ + kl2 ϕ + cb2 ϕ = 0 ¨ ˙ 6 (1.23) The moment which act on the plate due to the interaction with the spring k and the damper c is M = −kl2 ϕ − cb2 ϕ ˙ (1.22) The moment of inertia of the plate 1 about its axis of rotation is I= mb2 6 (1.26) (1. 17) is govern by the generalized Newton’s equation Iϕ = M ¨ (1.25) .24) Hence or ϕ + 2ςω n ϕ + ω 2 ϕ = 0 ¨ ˙ n where ω2 = n 6kl2 mb2 2ςω n = 6c m (1.

The damping properties of the system are modelled by the linear damping of the damping coeﬃcient c.I ωt c l µ Figure 18 The electric motor of mass M (see Fig. Produce the equation of motion of the system. 18)is mounted on the massless beam of length l. . The shaft of the motor has a mass m and rotates with the angular velocity ω.MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 24 Problem 5 m M E. the second moment of inertia of its cross-section I and the Young modulus E. Its unbalance (the distance between the axis of rotation and the shaft centre of gravity) is µ.

The wheel is supported by the spring of stiﬀness k and the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c. The right hand end of the damper moves along the horizontal axis y and its motion is given by the following equation y = a sin ωt Produce the equation of motion of the system 0 A c y .MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 25 Problem 6 k d D l L Figure 19 The wheel shown in the Fig. It can oscillate about the horizontal axis O. 19 is made of the material of a density .

MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 26 Problem 7 2 L r 1 Figure 20 The cylinder 1 of mass m is attached to the rigid and massless rod 2 to form the pendulum shown in the Fig. Produce the formula for the period of oscillation of the pendulum. 20. .

MODELLING OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 27 Problem 8 O k l b 1 a m c Figure 21 The thin and uniform plate 1 (see Fig. . Produce the formula for the natural frequency of the system. The spring of stiﬀness k keeps it in the horizontal position. 21) of mass m can rotate about the horizontal axis O. The damping coeﬃcient c reﬂects dissipation of energy of the system.

let us assume that at the instant t = 0 the system was at the position x0 and was forced to move with the initial velocity v0 .29 is a linear combination of its two particular linearly independent solutions.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 28 1.29) Hence.1 Free vibration DEFINITION: It is said that a system performs free vibration if there are no external forces (forces that are explicitly dependent on time) acting on this system. The particular solution can be predicted in the form 1.33) Their linear combination is the wanted general solution and approximates the free vibration of the undamped system. If one assume that the damping ratio ς is equal to zero.29 yields the characteristic equation λ2 + ω 2 = 0 (1.30. the mathematical model that is analyzed in this section takes form x + 2ςωn x + ω2 x = 0 ¨ ˙ n (1. In this section. These solutions can be obtained by means of the following procedure. To get an unique solution it is necessary to specify the initial position and the initial velocity of the system considered. x + ω2 x = 0 ¨ n Free vibration of an undamped system The general solution of the homogeneous equation 1.28 governs the free motion of the undamped system.30 into the equation 1. Introduction of these initial conditions . according to the above deﬁnition.28 is classiﬁed as linear homogeneous ordinary diﬀerential equation of second order.31) n This characteristic equation has two roots λ1 = +iω n and λ2 = −iω n (1. x = eλt (1.2. Hence. it is assumed that the resultant of all external forces f (t) is equal to zero.30) Introduction of the solution 1.2 ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 1. the equation 1. in this case. x = Cs sin ω n t + Cc cos ω n t (1.32) (1. Hence.34) The two constants Cs and Cc should be chosen to fulﬁll the initial conditions which reﬂect the way the free vibrations were initiated.28) The equation 1. the independent particular solution are x1 = sin ωn t and x2 = cos ωn t (1.

in the case considered is periodic.5 C 0 α -0.34. α = arctan ! (1.5 Tn Figure 22 DEFINITION: The shortest time after which parameters of motion repeat themselves is called period and the motion is called periodic motion. Cc = x0 Cs ω n = v0 (1. 22 The free motion.35) According to 1.37) For ω n = 1[1/s]. According to this deﬁnition. x[m] 1 vo xo 0.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 29 into the equation 1.5 10 20 30 40 50 t[s] -1 -1.34 results in two algebraic equation that are linear with respect to the unknown constants Cs and Cc .36) where C= s µ v0 ωn ¶2 Ã x0 v0 ωn (x0 )2 + . we have sin(ω n (t + Tn ) + α) = sin(ωn t + α + 2π) (1. the particular solution that represents the free vibration of the system is v0 sin ω n t + x0 cos ω n t = x = ωn = C sin(ω n t + α) (1. since the sine function has a period equal to 2π.38) . x0 = 1[m] v0 = 1[m/s] and ς = 0 the free motion is shown in Fig.

the period of the undamped free vibrations is Tn = Free vibration of a damped system If the damping ratio is not equal to zero.underdamped vibration If ς < 1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 30 Hence.2 = −ςω n ± iω n 1 − ς 2 = −ςω n ± iω d where ωd = ωn The particular solutions are p 1 − ς2 (1.41) (1.30 into 1. Three cases are possible Case one . the equation of the free motion is ˙ x + 2ςωn x + ω2 x = 0 ¨ n Introduction of the equation 1.2 = 2 (1. p (1.40) 2π ωn (1.40 yields the characteristic equation λ2 + 2ςωn λ + ω 2 = 0 n The characteristic equation has two roots p p −2ςω n ± (2ςωn )2 − 4ω 2 n = −ςωn ± ωn ς 2 − 1 λ1.45) (1. the characteristic equation has two complex conjugated roots and this case is often referred to as the underdamped vibration.39) (1.43) λ1.44) x1 = e−ςωn t sin ωd t and x2 = e−ςωn t cos ω d t and their linear combination is x = e−ςωn t (Cs sin ω d t + Cc cos ω d t) For the following initial conditions x |t=0 = x0 the two constants Cs and Cc are Cs = Cc v0 + ςω n x0 ωd = x0 x |t=0 = v0 ˙ (1.46) (1.48) .47) (1.42) The particular solution depend on category of the above roots.

49) where sµ C= ¶2 v0 + ςω n x0 ωd + (x0 )2 . 23In this case the motion is not periodic but the time Td (see Fig. α = arctan x0 ω d .1 the free motion is shown in Fig. 23) between every p 1 − ς2 x[m] vo xo 1 t 0.46 produces the free motion in the following form x = e−ςωn t (Cs sin ω d t + Cc cos ω d t) = Ce−ςωn t sin(ω d t + α) (1.48 into 1. v0 + ςω n x0 ωd = ωn (1. It is easy to see from the expression 1.49 that Td = 2π ωd (1.51) DEFINITION: Natural logarithm of ratio of two displacements x(t) and x(t + Td ) that are one period apart is called logarithmic decrement of damping and will be denoted by δ.50) For ω n = 1[1/s].5 Td x(t+ Td ) x(t) 0 10 20 30 40 50 t[s] -0.5 -1 Td -1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 31 Introduction of the expressions 1. x0 = 1[m] v0 = 1[m/s] and ς = .5 Figure 23 second zero-point is constant and it is called period of the dumped vibration. .

40 can be easily identiﬁed by measuring the period of the free motion Td .60) x = e−ςωn t (x0 + t(v0 + x0 ω n )) For ω n = 1[1/s]. the free motion is shown in Fig.53) 4π 2 + δ 2 The other parameter ωn that exists in the mathematical model 1.52) 1 − ς2 This formula is frequently used for the experimental determination of the damping ratio ς.55) Introduction of the expressions 1.59 into 1.57 produces expression for the free motion in the following form (1. The critical damping oﬀers for the system the possibly faster return to its equilibrium position.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 32 It will be shown that the logaritmic decrement is constant.59) x |t=0 = v0 ˙ (1.54) ωn = √ 1 − ς2 Td 1 − ς 2 Case two .2 = −ςωn The particular solutions are x1 = e−ςωn t and their linear combination is x = Cs e−ςωn t + Cc te−ςωn t For the following initial conditions x |t=0 = x0 the two constants Cs and Cc are as follow Cs = x0 Cc = v0 + x0 ωn (1. According to the formula 1.57) and x2 = te−ςωn t (1. 24. δ ς=p (1. Indeed δ = ln Ce−ςωn t sin(ω d t + α) x (t) = ln −ςωn (t+T ) = d sin(ω (t + T ) + α) x (t + Td ) Ce d d Ce−ςωn t sin(ωd t + α) 2πςω n 2πςωn = ln −ςωn t −ςωn T = ςω n Td = = √ = d sin(ω t + 2π + α) Ce e ωd ωn 1 − ς 2 d 2πς = √ (1.critically damped vibration If ς = 1.58) (1.56) (1.44 and 1. the characteristic equation has two real and equal one to each other roots and this case is often referred to as the critically damped vibration λ1.51 ωd 2π = √ (1. x0 = 1[m] v0 = 1[m/s] and ς = 1. .

63) (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 33 x[m] vo xo 1 0. p p λ1.62) For the following initial conditions ³ ´ √ √ 2 2 x = e−ωn t Cs eωn ς −1)t + Cc e−ωn ς −1)t x |t=0 = x0 x |t=0 = v0 ˙ (1.64) the two constants Cs and Cc are as follow Cs Cc √ v + ω0 + x0 (+ς + ς 2 − 1) n √ = 2 ς2 − 1 √ v − ω0 + x0 (−ς + ς 2 − 1) n √ = 2 ς2 − 1 (1.5 0 10 20 30 40 50 t[s] -0. the free motion is shown in Fig.65) For ω n = 1[1/s].61) x1 = e−ωn (ς+ and their linear combination is √ ς 2 −1)t The particular solutions are and x2 = e−ωn (ς− √ ς 2 −1)t (1.5 -1 -1. x0 = 1[m] v0 = 1[m/s] and ς = 5.5 Figure 24 Case three .2 = −ςω n ± ω n ς 2 − 1 = ωn (−ς ± ς 2 − 1) (1. the characteristic equation has two real roots and this case is often referred to as the overdamped vibration. 25 .overdamped vibration If ς > 1.

the initial conditions and the exciting force. according to the previous consideration. Such a case is referred to as the harmonic excitation. 2ςωn = . f (t) = q sin ωt (1. x + 2ςωn x + ω 2 x = f (t) ¨ ˙ n where k Fex (t) c .2 Forced vibration In a general case motion of a vibrating system is due to both. x = xg + xp (1.5 -1 -1.70) .ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 34 x[m] vo x o 1 0.67) m m m The general solution of this mathematical model is a superposition of the general solution of the homogeneous equation xg and the particular solution of the nonhomogeneous equation xp .66) To produce the particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation.5 0 10 20 30 40 50 t[s] -0. The mathematical model.68) ωn = The general solution of the homogeneous equation has been produced in the previous section and for the underdamped vibration it is xg = e−ςωn t (Cs sin ω d t + Cc cos ω d t) = Ce−ςωn t sin(ω d t + α) (1. let as assume that the excitation can be approximated by a harmonic function.5 Figure 25 1. f (t) = (1.2.69) r (1. is the linear non-homogeneous diﬀerential equation of second order.

Therefore.77) (1.71 for any instant of time.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 35 In the above equation q represents the amplitude of the unit excitation and ω is the excitation frequency.76) ϕ = arctan Ac 2(ςω n )ω = − arctan 2 As ωn − ω2 (1.72) (1.69 and 1.72 yields xp = As sin ωt + Ac cos ωt = A sin(ωt + ϕ) where A= or p q A2 + A2 = p s c (ω 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4(ςωn )2 ω 2 n A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 q ω2 n (1.79) .76 into the 1.71 in the following form x = Ce−ςωn t sin(ω d t + α) + A sin(ωt + ϕ) (1.74) Solution of the above equations yields the expression for the constant As and Ac ¯ ¯ ¯ q −2ςω n ω ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 (ω2 − ω2 ) ¯ (ω 2 − ω 2 )q n n ¯= 2 As = ¯ 2 2 )2 + 4(ςω )2 ω 2 ¯ (ω n − ω 2 ) −2ςω n ω ¯ (ωn − ω n ¯ ¯ 2 2 ¯ ¯ 2ςω n ω (ωn − ω ) ¯ ¯ 2 ¯ (ω n − ω 2 ) q ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 2ςω n ω 0 ¯ −2(ςωn )ωq ¯= 2 Ac = ¯ 2 (1.71 one can get ¢ ¡ ¢ ¡ 2 (ωn − ω2 )As − 2ςωn ωAc sin ωt+ 2ςω n ωAs + (ω 2 − ω 2 )Ac cos ωt = q sin ωt (1.68 one can obtain the general solution of the equation of motion 1.78) ω 2ς ωn ϕ = − arctan ω 1 − ( ωn )2 Introducing 1. implementing it in equation 1.71) where As and Ac are constant.72 is the particular solution if and only if it fulﬁls the equation 1.66 yields ˙ x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = q sin ωt ¨ n In this case it is easy to predict mode of the particular solution xp = As sin ωt + Ac cos ωt (1. Introduction of the expression 1. The function 1.75) 2 ¯ (ω n − ω ) −2ςω n ω ¯ (ωn − ω2 )2 + 4(ςω n )2 ω2 ¯ ¯ ¯ 2ςω n ω (ω2 − ω2 ) ¯ n Introduction of the expressions 1.73) n This relationship is fulﬁlled for any instant of time if (ω 2 − ω 2 )As − 2ςω n ωAc = q n 2ςωn ωAs + (ω2 − ω2 )Ac = 0 n (1.70 into equation 1.75 into the predicted solution 1.

126835[rd] is shown in Fig.6 0. Co = 1[m].1.The solution 1. due to the existing damping. αo = 1[rd].82 (curve b in Fig.8 0.4 -0. 1.2 -0. First term represents an x[m] 1 0. x = Co e−ςωn t sin(ω d t + αo ) + A sin(ωt + ϕ) (1.6 c b a A t[s] 20 40 60 transient state of the forced vibration steady state of the forced vibration Figure 26 oscillations with frequency equal to the natural frequency of the damped system ωd . 26 (curve c). after an usually short time. For the following initial conditions x |t=0 = x0 x |t=0 = v0 ˙ (1. for the following numerical data ς = 0.80) one can get the following set of the algebraic equations for determination of the parameters C and α x0 = Co sin αo + A sin ϕ v0 = −Co ςω n sin αo + Co ω d cos αo + Aω cos ϕ (1. decays to zero (curve a in Fig.2 0 -0.81 (Co.82) This solution.4 0.82) and determines time of the transient state of the forced vibrations.81) Introduction of the solution of the equations 1. ω = 2[1/s]. ω n = 1[1/s]. Motion approximated by the equation 1. 1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 36 The constants C and α should be chosen to fullﬁl the required initial conditions. the transient state changes into the steady state represented by the second term in equation 1.83) This harmonic term has amplitude A determined by the formula 1. . A = 0.83 is usually referred to as the system forced vibration.82) x = A sin(ωt + ϕ) (1. yields particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation that represents the forced vibration of the system considered.82 is assembled out of two terms. Motion represented by this term. Hence. ϕ = 0.165205[m]. It does not depend on the initial conditions and is called amplitude of the forced vibration. αo ) to the general solution.77.

70) and the (steady state) forced vibration x = A sin(ωt + ϕ) (1. the exciting force f (t) = q sin ωt (1. 28. they can be represented by means of two vectors ’rotating’ with the same angular velocity ω (see Fig. If µ represents the static imbalance of the rotor . a) m µ ω 2 sin ω t x mµ ω 2 b) x m µ ω 2 sin ω t µ ωt m M k M c R Figure 28 One of many possible excitation of vibrations is excitation caused by inertia forces produced by moving elements.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 37 Both.83) are harmonic. Because the transient state.force transmitted to foundation. Forced response due to rotating elements . 27). Therefore ϕ is called phase of the forced vibration. from engineering point of view play secondary role. The possibly simplest case of vibration cased by this type of excitation is shown in Fig. The rotor of an electrical motor rotates with the constant angular velocity ω. Therefore. in the following sections the steady state forced vibration will be considered only.One x q A qsin(ω t ) Asin(ω t+ ϕ ) ϕ ωt Figure 27 can see from the above interpretation that the angular displacement ϕ is the phase between the exciting force and the displacement it causes.

ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 38 and m is its mass. The physical model of the problem described is shown in Fig.89) (1.84) The motor of mass M is supported by means of a beam of the stiﬀness k. Its maximum depends on the damping ratio and appears for ω > ω n .88) (1. the steady state forced vibration are x = A sin(ωt + ϕ) where according to 1.85) (1.88 A The ratio m µ .86) (1. then the rotor produces the centrifugal force F = mµω 2 Its component along the vertical axis x is Fx = mµω2 sin ωt (1. If the frequency of m excitation tends towards inﬁnity. This phenomenon is called phase resonance. If the frequency of excitation A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 ω 2ς ωn ϕ = − arctan ω 1 − ( ωn )2 (1. the amplitude of the forced vibration tends to M µ. Taking advantage of the earlier described method of formulation the mathematical model we have M x = −kx − cx + mµω 2 sin ωt ¨ ˙ Transformation of this equation into the standard form yields ˙ x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = q sin ωt ¨ n where ωn = k c 2ςωn = M M Hence. For ω = ωn .If the frequency of excitation changes from zero to the value equal to the natural frequency ωn .90) or. Let us model vibration of the system. taking into consideration 1. the amplitude of the forced vibration is growing. phase of the forced vibration is equal to 90o . Its magnitude and the phase ϕ as M ω a function of the ratio ωn for diﬀerent damping factor ς is shown in Fig. The damping properties are approximated by the damping coeﬃcient c.91) . regardless the damping involved. 28b).77 A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 m ω µ( ωn )2 M q ω2 n ω 2ς ωn ϕ = − arctan ω 1 − ( ωn )2 (1. is called the magniﬁcation factor. 29.87) mµω 2 M r q= (1. The phenomenon at which amplitude of the forced vibration is maximum is called amplitude resonance.

25 ζ=0.1 ζ =0.5 ζ=1.0 ζ=1.0 ζ=1.1 ζ =0.5 Figure 29 .5 0 1 ω ωn ζ=0 2 3 1 0 -45 2 3 ϕ -90 -135 -180 ζ=0.5 ζ=1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 39 6 4 A m µ M 2 1 ζ=0 ζ=0.25 ζ=0.

according to the physical model shown in Fig.0 ζ=1. Forced response due to the kinematic excitation . 31b). the phase tends to 180o . Hence the response of the system tends to be in the anti-phase with the excitation.For the frequency of excitation ω < 1.92) The amplitude of the reaction is p √ |R| = A k 2 + c2 ω2 = AM ω4 + 4ς 2 ω 2 ω 2 = n n q 2 ( ω )2 1 + 4ς ωn = mµω 2 q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 |R| ω The ampliﬁcation ratio mµω2 of the reaction as a function of the ratio ωn is shown in Fig.4 ω 2 n ω 3 Figure 30 is greater then the centrifugal force itself with its maximum close to frequency ωn .4ω n the force transmitted to foundation 6 ζ=0 ζ=0. For ω > 1.4ω n this reaction is smaller then the excitation force and tends to zero when the frequency of excitation approaches inﬁnity.5 4 R mµ ω 2 2 1 0 0 1 1. The force transmitted to the foundation R.1 ζ =0.25 ζ=0. Motion of the point B along the axis y causes vibration of the block M.5 ζ=1.vibration isolation The physical model of a system with the kinematic excitation is shown in Fig. This physical . 30. 28b) is √ R(t) = kx + cx = kA sin(ωt + ϕ) + cAω cos(ωt + ϕ) = A k2 + c2 ω 2 sin(ωt + ϕ + δ) ˙ (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 40 tends to inﬁnity.

98) (1.97) (1.39 is ω= 2πv L (1. The stiﬀness k of the spring and the damping coeﬃcient c represent the dynamic properties of the bus shock-absorbers.95 yields M x + cx + kx = ka sin ωt + caω cos ωt ¨ ˙ or ˙ x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = ω2 a sin ωt + 2ςω n ωa cos ωt = q sin(ωt + α) ¨ n n where q= aω 2 n r ω 1 + 4ς 2 ( )2 ωn (1. the frequency of excitation.95) . the period of the harmonic excitation is T = L v (1. 31a). If the surface can be approximated by the sine-wave of the amplitude a and length L and the bus is travelling with the constant velocity v.93) Hence. according to 1. The block of mass M stands for the body of the bus.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 41 a) b) x M y v G k L a R y B c Figure 31 model can be used to analyze vibration of a bus caused by the roughness of the surface of the road shown in Fig.94) and the motion of the point B along the axis y can approximated as follows y = a sin ωt The equation of motion of the bus is M x = −kx − cx + ky + cy ¨ ˙ ˙ Introduction of 1.96) (1.

92) or the amplitude A (e. 32. 1.g.83 x = A sin(ωt + ϕ) where A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 q ω2 n (1. 1..ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 42 Without any harm to the generality of the considerations one can neglect the phase α and adopt the mathematical model in the following form ˙ x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = q sin ωt ¨ n Motion of the block along axis x is governed by the equation 1.101) is called vibration isolation.99) ϕ = − arctan ω 2ς ωn ω 1 − ( ωn )2 (1.100) Introduction of equation 1.g.102) Problem of minimizing the reaction force R (e. .101) ω The magnifying factor A and the phase ϕ as a function of ωn is shown in Fig.4ωn it is possible to arrange for the bus to have vibration smaller than the amplitude of the kinematic excitation The expression for the reaction force transmitted to the foundation is R = kx + cx − ky − cy = kA sin(ωt + ϕ) + cωA cos(ωt + ϕ) − ka sin ωt − cωa cos ωt ˙ ˙ = |R| sin(ωt + γ) (1. a For ω < 1.98 gives q ω a 1 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 ϕ = − arctan ω 2ς ωn ω 1 − ( ωn )2 (1.

0 ζ=1.25 ζ=0.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 43 6 4 A a 2 ζ=0 ζ=0.5 ζ =0.5 Figure 32 .5 0 0 1 1 0 -45 ω ωn 2 2 3 3 ϕ -90 -135 -180 ζ=0 ζ=1.1 ζ=1.25 ζ=0.1 ζ =0.5 ζ=1.0 ζ=0.

3 Problems Free vibrations Problem 9 1 H 2 k c Figure 33 The carriage 1 of the lift shown in Fig. . To attenuate the impact between the carriage and the basement in the case the rope 3 is broken. 33 operates between ﬂoors of a building.2.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 44 1. The distance between the highest and the lowest ﬂoor is H = 30m. the shock absorber 2 is to be installed. The average mass of the carriage is m = 500kg. Calculate the stiﬀness k and the damping coeﬃcient c of the shock-absorber which assure that the deceleration during the impact is smaller then 200m/s2 .

105) (1. x H mg x k c Figure 34 Due to the gravity force the lift is falling down with the initial velocity equal to zero.107) (1. the lift is at the level H when the rope brakes.104) (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 45 Solution In the worst case scenario.103) By double side by side integrating of the above equation one can get g x = A + Bt + t2 2 Introduction of the following initial conditions ˙ x |t=0 = 0 x |t=0 = 0 yields A = 0 and B = 0 and results in the following equation of motion g x = t2 2 Hence. the time the lift reaches the shock-absorber is s 2H to = g Since v = x = gt ˙ (1.106) . Equation of motion of the lift is m¨ = mg x (1.

109) c k . In this case.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 46 To analyze the motion of the lift after impact let us introduce the inertial axis y in such a way that its origin coincides with the upper end of the shock-absorber at the instant of impact (see Fig.Since at the instant of impact the spring k is the velocity of the lift at the time of the impact with the shock-absorber is p ˙ (1. 35).108) vo = x |t=to = 2Hg H x y k y mg c Figure 35 uncompressed.112) ωn The best performance of the shock-absorber is expected if the damping is critical (ς = 1). the equation of motion after the lift has reached the shock-absorber is m¨ + cy + ky = mg y ˙ or in the standardized form ˙ y + 2ςωn y + ω2 y = g ¨ n where ωn = r (1.110) (1.111) m m It is easy to see that in the case considered the particular solution of the nonhomogeneous equation is g yp = 2 (1. 2ςωn = (1. there exists one double root and the general solution of the homogeneous equation is yg = C1 e−ωn t + C2 te−ωn t (1.113) .

one can see that the maximum of the deceleration occurs for time t = 0.124) Since ω n = the stiﬀness of the shock-absorber is k = ω 2 m = 4.117) = 1 − e−ωn t + vo − ω2 ωn n where D= g ω2 n E = vo − g ωn (1.116) (1. Hence vo > If (1. 2vo ωn − g < aa It follows q aa + g 200 + 10 ωn < √ = √ = 4.118) Double diﬀerentiation of the function 1.120) n g ωn both constants E and D are positive.125) .123) (1.119) n n By inspection of the function 1.121) amax = Dω 2 + 2Eω n = g + 2vo ω n − 2g = 2vo ω n − g n (1.114) ωn This equation has to fullﬁl the following initial conditions y |t=0 = 0 y |t=0 = vo ˙ Introduction of these initial conditions into the equation 1.117 yields acceleration during the impact ¡ ¢ y = −Dω2 − 2Eωn e−ωn t + Eω 2 te−ωn t ¨ (1.28s−1 2 2Hg 2 2 · 30 · 10 k . m (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 47 Therefore the general solution of the non-homogeneous equation as the sum of yp and yg is g y = C1 e−ωn t + C2 te−ωn t + 2 (1.113 yields C1 = − g ω2 n C2 = vo − g ωn (1.122) This deceleration has to be smaller then the allowed deceleration aa = 200ms−2 . Hence the maximum of deceleration is ¯ ¯ amax = y |t=0 = ¯−Dω2 − 2Eωn ¯ ¨ (1.282 · 500 = 9160N/m n (1.118.115) and results in the following equation of motion µ ¶ ¶ µ g g g −ω n t y = − 2 e te−ωn t + 2 + vo − ωn ωn ωn ¶ µ ¡ ¢ ¢ g ¡ g te−ωn t = D 1 − e−ωn t + Ete−ωn t (1.

121 is fullﬁl. 36 .5 > = ωn 4.4m/s 2Hg = 2 · 30 · 10 = 24.127) The displacement of the lift. Indeed vo = (1.126) Our computation can be accepted only if the inequality 1. its velocity and acceleration during the impact as a function of time is shown in Fig.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 48 and the damping coeﬃcient c = 2ςω n m = 2 · 1 · 4.28 (1.28 · 500 = 4280Ns/m p √ g 10 = 2.

25 0.25 0.5 displacement y [m] 1 0.25 0.5 0.5 0.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 49 2.75 1 time [s] 25 20 15 velocity v [m/s] 10 5 0 -5 0.75 1 time [s] 50 acceleration 0 0.5 0 0 0.75 1 time [s] -50 a [m/s 2] -100 -150 -200 Figure 36 .5 2 1.5 0.

38b). The winch was loaded with the weight equal to M1 = 1000kg as shown in Fig. 37a) To a) T b) k c x W R m Figure 37 analyze the vibrations of the power winch the installation was modelled by the one degree of freedom physical model shown in Fig. k. and c. k and c respectively. . k. 39. stiﬀness and damping coeﬃcient are denoted by m. and c. Calculate the parameters m. 38.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 50 Problem 10 The power winch W was mounted on the truss T as shown in Fig. Record of those oscillations is presented in Fig. In this ﬁgure the equivalent mass. To identify the unknown parameters m. Origin of the axis x coincides with the centre of gravity of the weight m when the system rests in its equilibrium position. the following experiment was carried out. Then the load was released allowing the installation to perform the vertical T W R L Ml Figure 38 oscillations in x direction.

003 0.002 -0. k = 3000000Nm−1 .001 -0.002 0. c = 15000N sm−1 .003 1 2 time [s] 3 4 Figure 39 Answer m = 7000kg.001 x[m] 0 -0.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 51 0.

.Assuming that the rope T W R M Figure 41 R is not extendible produce expression for the tension in the rope R before and after the block will lose contact with the ﬂoor.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 52 Problem 11 a) T b) k c x m W R Figure 40 The winch W shown in Fig. 41). The winch is lifting the block of mass M with the constant velocity vo (see Fig. 40 is modelled as a system with one degree of freedom of mass m stiﬀness k and the damping coeﬃcient c.

130 governs motion of the winch till the tension T will reach value Mg.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 53 Solution Tension in the rope R before the contact is lost In the ﬁrst stage of lifting the block M.130) The equation 1.132) k If Mg < cvo then xs = ts = 0. The tension T in the rope R varies between 0 and Mg. the equation of motion of the winch and the block (see Fig.129) In the above equation x = 0 (the winch is moving with the constant velocity vo ).128) If origin of the inertial axis x coincides with the gravity centre when the unloaded winch is at its equilibrium. Therefore the equation 1.135) (1.130 allows the time of separation ts to be obtained. ¨ x = −vo and x = −vo t.133) Tension in the rope R after the contact of the weight with the ﬂoor is lost Without any harm to the generality of the further consideration one may assume that the time corresponding to the instant of separation is equal to 0. the instantaneous length of the rope L is L = Lo − vo t (1. ts = Mg − cvo kvo (1.134) . For t > 0. 42) are as following m¨ + cx + kx = −T x ˙ M xb = T − Mg ¨ Since the rope R is not extendible. 0 < T 0 Mg (1.131) At the instant of separation the winch will be at the position determined by the following formula Mg − cvo xs = −vo ts = − (1. If Mg > cvo T = cvo + kvo t f or 0 < t < ts (1. the equation of motion of the winch is m¨ + cx + kx = −T x ˙ (1. it stays motionlessly at the ﬂoor whereas the lift itself is going down with respect to the inertial axis x with the constant velocity vo . Hence ˙ −T = c(−vo ) + k(−vo t) (1.

136) m¨ + cx + kx = −T x ˙ M x = T − Mg ¨ (1. Hence q ω 2 A = q. Taking into account that L = x − xb we have Introduction of the equation 1. q=− (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 54 k c x m x T xb L T Mg Figure 42 Where Lo stands for the initial length of the rope (the lenght the rope had at the instance t = 0).140) .134 yields xb = x − L = x − Lo + vo t (1. 2ςωn = .141) m+M m+M m+M The particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation can be predicted as a constant magnitude A.139) x + 2ςωn x + ω 2 x = q ¨ ˙ n where k Mg c .142) n ωn ωn = r (1.137 into 1. A= 2 (1.137) (1.138) The standardized form is as following Elimination of the unknown tension force allows the equation of motion of the winch to be formulated (m + M)¨ + cx + kx = −Mg x ˙ (1.

43 The tension is x xs O t A xmax Td Figure 43 determined by the equation 1.147) The time history diagram of the above function is shown in Fig.146) µ ¶ −vo + ςω n (xs − A) sin ωd t + (xs − A) cos ωd t + A ωd (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 55 The general solution of the mathematical model 1.138 T = M x + Mg ¨ (1.144) This solution has to fulﬁll the following initial conditions f or t = 0 x = xs x = −vo ˙ (1.140 is x = e−ςωn t (Cs sin ωd t + Cc cos ωd t) + A where ωd = ωn p 1 − ς2 (1.143 yields the following expressions for the constants Cs and Cc Cs = Hence.148) .145) Introduction of these initial conditions into the solution 1. x=e −ςω n t −vo + ςωn (xs − A) ωd Cc = xs − A (1.143) (1.

147 yields the wanted tension as a function of time ¡ ¢ T = Mg + Me−ςωn t Cs (ςωn )2 + 2Cc ςω n ω d − Cs ω 2 sin ω d t d ¡ ¢ (1.149) +Me−ςωn t Cc (ςω n )2 − 2Cs ςω n ωd + Cc ω 2 cos ω d t d .ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 56 Double diﬀerentiation of the function 1.

rotates with the constant angular velocity ω and its unbalance (distance between the axis of rotation and the shaft centre of gravity) is µ. of mass m. 44) is mounted on the massless beam of length l. . the second moment of inertia of its cross-section I and Young modulus E. Shaft of the motor. The damping properties of the system are modelled by the linear damping of the damping coeﬃcient c. Produce expression for the amplitude of the forced vibration of the motor as well as the interaction forces transmitted to the foundation at the points A and B.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 57 Forced vibration Problem 12 E.I m M ωt c B l Figure 44 A µ The electric motor of mass M (see Fig.

151) (1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 58 Solution E.152) mµω2 M r q= (1.150) 48EI l3 (1. 45 results in the following diﬀerential equations of motion.152 x = A sin (ωt + ϕ) where A= q ω ω (1 − ( ωn )2 )2 + 4ς 2 ( ωn )2 q ω2 n ω 2ς ωn ϕ = − arctan ω 1 − ( ωn )2 (1.153) (1.155) represents the forced vibrations of the system. . k= Its standardized form is x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = q sin ωt ¨ ˙ n where ωn = k c 2ςω n = M m+M The particular solution of the equation 1. In the above formula A stands for the amplitude of the forced vibrations of the motor.I m M x mµω 2 ωt c B µ l A Figure 45 Application of the Newton’s approach to the system shown in Fig.154) (1. M x = −kx − cx + mµω 2 sin ωt ¨ ˙ where k stands for the stiﬀness of the beam EI. The interaction force at the point A can be determined from equilibrium of forces acting on the beam at an arbitrarily chosen position x (see Fig 46).

5k x The force needed to displace the point D by x is equal to kx. ˙ ˙ Hence. the reaction at the point A is RA = −0.5k x l Figure 46 0. from the equilibrium of the damper one can see that the reaction at the point B is RB = −cx = −cωA sin (ωt + ϕ) ˙ . Hence.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 59 x E. 47) with the velocity x the force cx is required.I kx D x A 0.5kA sin (ωt + ϕ) (1.156) x cx x D c B cx Figure 47 To move the point D (see Fig.5kx = −0.

. Its base 2 is attached to the vibrating object 1.157) where y is the absolute displacement of the vibration object 1 and x is the absolute displacement of the seismic weight 3.158) derive the formula for the ampliﬁcation coeﬃcient κ of the amplitude of vibration of amplitude of z the object 1 of this transducer ( κ = amplitude of y ) as a function of the non-dimensional ω frequency ωn .ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 60 Problem 13 z 5 x 3 z=x-y 4 y 2 1 Figure 48 Figure 48 presents a seismic transducer. The seismic weight 3 of mass m is supported by the spring 4 of stiﬀness k and the damper 5 of the damping coeﬃcient c. Upon assuming that the object 1 performs a harmonic motion y = a sin ωt (1.This transducer records the displacement z =x−y (1.

168) κ= ampy The diagram presented in Fig.49 shows this ampliﬁcation coeﬃcient κ as a function ω of the ratio ωn .161) (1.162) According to equation 1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 61 Solution The equation of motion of the system shown in Fig.162 is xp = aA sin(ωt + α + ϕ) where r 4ς 2 ³ ω ωn (1.167) Therefore.165) z = x − y = aA sin(ωt + α + ϕ) − a sin ωt = = aA cos (α + ϕ) sin ωt + aA sin (α + ϕ) cos ωt − a sin ωt = = (aA cos (α + ϕ) − a) sin ωt + aA sin (α + ϕ) cos ωt (1. the coeﬃcient of ampliﬁcation is ampz p 2 = A + 1 − 2A cos(α + ϕ) (1.76 (page 35) the particular solution of the equation 1.160) (1. the record of the .159) (1.166) The amplitude of this record is q p ampz = (aA cos (α + ϕ) − a)2 + (aA sin (α + ϕ))2 = a A2 + 1 − 2A cos(α + ϕ) (1.164) A = sµ ³ ´2 ¶2 ³ ´2 ω ω 1 − ωn + 4ς 2 ωn Hence the record of the transducer is ´2 +1 ω 2ς ωn ϕ = − arctan ³ ´2 ω 1 − ωn (1.163) r (1. 48 is m¨ + cx + kx = cy + ky x ˙ ˙ Its standardize form is x + 2ςω n x + ω2 x = aqc cos ωt + aqs sin ωt ¨ ˙ n where ωn = k c c k 2ςω n = qc = ω qs = m m m m Simpliﬁcation of the right side of the above equation yields x + 2ςω n x + ω 2 x = aq sin (ωt + α) ¨ ˙ n where p 2 2 q = qc + qs = ω 2 n s 4ς 2 µ ω ωn ¶2 +1 α = arctan qc ω = arctan 2ς qs ωn (1.If the coeﬃcient of ampliﬁcation κ is equal to one.

6 5 ζ=0.5 4 κ 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 ω/ ω n 4 5 Figure 49 .1 ζ=0. as one can see from the diagram 49.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 62 amplitude of vibration (ampz ) is equal to the amplitude of vibration of the object (ampy = a). if the frequency ω of the recorded vibrations is twice greater than the natural frequency ωn of the transducer and the damping ratio ς is 0.25 ζ=0.25. It almost happends.

the expression for the driving force that has to be applied to the point C . the expression for the interaction force at the point A 4. 50. The motion of the lower end of the spring with respect to the absolute coordinate x can be approximated as follows x = X cos ωt where X stands for the amplitude of the oscillations of the point C and ω stands for the frequency of these oscillations. Produce: 1. It is supported with by means of the spring of the stiﬀness k and the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 63 Problem 14 α O A a b d c G B k C x Figure 50 The physical model of a vibrating table is shown in Fig. the expression for the amplitude of the forced vibrations of the table caused by the motion of the point C 3. It can be considered as a rigid body of the mass m and the moment of inertia about axis through its centre of gravity IG . the diﬀerential equation of motion of the vibrating table and present it in the standard form 2.

each of length L and mass m. The expression for the position xG of the center of gravity G of the pendulum Answer: xG = 3 L − a 4 2. The pendulum performs small oscillations α about the axis through the point A. The expression for the moment of inertia of the pendulum about the axis through the point A. At the point B it is supported by a spring of stiﬀness k and a damper of damping coeﬃcient c. were joined together to form the pendulum whose physical model is depicted in Fig. 51. Answer: 17 IA = 12 mL2 + 2maH2 − 3mLa 3. The diﬀerential equation of motion of the pendulum Answer: α + 2ζω n α + ω2 α = q cos ωt ¨ ˙ n . The point C of the damper is driven along the axis Y and its motion is approximated by the following function Y = A sin ωt Produce: 1.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 64 Problem 15 C Y c B k a α 1 2 G A xG L L/2 L/2 Figure 51 Two uniform rods (1 and 2).

ω 2 = 2mgxIG +ka q = Aωca n IA IA A 4.ANALYSIS OF ONE-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 2 2 65 where: 2ζω n = ca . The expression for the amplitude of the forced vibrations of the pendulum Answer: q ω2 n Aα = 2 2 ω ω 2 1−( ω ) +4ζ 2 ( ω ) n n 5. The driving force that must be applied to the point C to assure the assumed motion . ω 2ζ ω n D = c(Aω cos ωt − aAα cos(ωt + ϕ)) ϕ = − arctan ω 2 1−( ω ) n .

yi (t)) are motionless with respect to a global (inertial) system of coordinates . In this chapter it will be assumed that forces produced by these massless xj mj xi k ij mi y i(t) ki ci c ij Figure 1 elements (springs and dampers) are linear functions of displacements and velocities respectively. Hence. It follows that to determine its position with respect to the inertial space one has to introduce inﬁnite number of coordinates. This process is called discretization and the ﬁnal result of this process is called multi-degree-of-freedom system. the real elements can be represented by a limited number of rigid elements connected to each other by means of massless elements representing the elastic and damping properties. But in many vibration problems. 2. therefore each of the particle the real element is made of can moves independently.1 Physical model Fig. These coordinates (xi . to describe motion of such a system a set of local generalized coordinates is introduced. Usually. according to the previously introduce deﬁnition. with acceptable accuracy. 1 shows part of a multi-degree-of-freedom system.Chapter 2 MECHANICAL VIBRATION OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM LINEAR SYSTEMS Since in the nature massless or rigid elements do not exist. the number of degrees of freedom of each real element is equal to inﬁnity. xj .1.1 MODELLING 2.

is the external excitation matrix x. 2. as it was mention earlier. .1. the force F must contains forces due to the displacement of the system from its equilibrium position only. Therefore.1) If the system stays at its equilibrium position. For this equilibrium position all the static forces acting on individual bodies produces the resultant force equal to zero. one may utilize the Newton’s or Euler’s equations.is the inertia matrix c . 1).is the displacement matrix There are many methods that allow the mathematical model to be formulated. In the following sections a few of them are presented. The coordinate yi (t) is not independent (is an explicit function of time) whereas the coordinates xi .is the stiﬀness matrix F . Newton-Euler method of formulation of the mathematical model To develop the equations of motion of the system described.is the damping matrix k. and xj are independent and their number determines the number of degree of freedom of the system. To ﬁgure these forces out let us move the mass mi out of its equilibrium position by the displacement xi . Since in case considered the body of mass mi performs a plane motion hence the Newton’s equations may be used. Origin of each coordinate coincides with the centre of gravity of individual bodies when the whole system is at its equilibrium position. the resultant of all static forces is equal zero. The conﬁguration a) shown in the ﬁgure below is achieved.2 Mathematical model It will be shown in this section that the equation of motion of the multi-degree of freedom linear system has the following form m¨+cx+kx=F(t) x ˙ where m .MODELLING 67 (not shown in the Fig. ¨ mi xi = F (2.

2) Due to this displacement there are two forces ki xi and kij xi acting on the considered mass mi . one has to carry out similar consideration for each mass involved in the system. . The last three conﬁgurations (d. Therefore they have to be taken with the sign ’-’. they are −ci xi and −cij xi . The forces caused by motion along the axis xj (conﬁguration e)) and axis yi ( conﬁguration f )) results in the term +cij xj . e. and f ) allow to take these forces into account. As a result of these consideration we are getting set of diﬀerential equation containing as many equations as the number of degree of freedom. Both of them must be taken with sign ’-’ because the positive displacement xi causes forces opposite to the positive direction of axis xi . Both of them are caused by ˙ ˙ positive velocity and have sense opposite to the positive sense of axis xi .4) To accomplished the mathematical model. Up to now it has been assumed that the velocities of the system along all coordinates are equal to zero and because of this the dampers do not produce any force. ¨ ˙ ˙ mi xi + (ci + cij )xi − cij xj + (ki + kij )xi − kij xj = ki yi (t) (2. and +ki yi (t) respectively. Since the system is linear. one can add all this forces together to obtain ¨ ˙ ˙ ˙ mi xi = −ki xi − kij xi + kij xj + ki yi (t) − ci xi − cij xi + cij xj (2.MODELLING 68 a) xi 6= 0 xj = 0 yi = 0 xi = 0 ˙ xj = 0 ˙ yi = 0 ˙ xj mj -kijxi kij cij xi mi xi -ki xi yi (t) k ci i b) xi = 0 xj 6= 0 yi = 0 xi = 0 ˙ xj = 0 ˙ yi = 0 ˙ xj xj mj cij mi yi (t) k i ci c) xi = 0 xj = 0 yi 6= 0 xi = 0 ˙ xj = 0 ˙ yi = 0 ˙ xj mj xi +kiyi yi (t) ki yi kij mi ci cij d) xi = 0 xj = 0 yi = 0 xi 6= 0 ˙ xj = 0 ˙ yi = 0 ˙ xj m j -cijxi k ij xi -ci xi yi (t) k i m i ci cij xi e) xi = 0 xj = 0 yi = 0 xi = 0 ˙ xj 6= 0 ˙ yi = 0 ˙ xj mj +cijxj k ij xi mi yi (t) k i ci xj cij f) xi = 0 xj = 0 yi = 0 xi = 0 ˙ xj = 0 ˙ yi 6= 0 ˙ xj mj xi kij mi yi (t) k i yj ci cij +kijxj kij xi +0 (2. Due to motion of the system along the coordinate xi with velocity xi two additional forces are created ˙ by the dampers ci and cij. Similar consideration carried out for the displacements along the axis xj (conﬁguration b)) and axis yi ( conﬁguration c)) results in the term +kij xj . and 0 ˙ respectively.3) mi xi = −ki xi − kij xi ¨ +kij xj +ki yi (t) −ci xi − cij xi ˙ ˙ +cij xj ˙ After standardization we have the ﬁnal form of equation of motion of the mass mi .

MODELLING 69 Lagrange method of formulation of the mathematical model The same set of equation of motion one can get by utilization of the Lagrange’s equations d ∂ ∂ ∂V ( T) − T+ = Qm dt ∂ qm ˙ ∂qm ∂qm where T . 2 is Vi = mi grGiZ (2.is the system kinetic energy function V .absolute velocity of the centre of gravity of the body ωix.mass of the rigid body vi . 3) is 1 (2. Iiz . ω iz.components of the absolute angular velocity of the body Iix .. Iiy .is the generalized force along the generalized coordinate qm The kinetic energy function of the system considered is equal to sum of the kinetic energy of the individual rigid bodies the system is made of.The principal moments of inertia of the body about axes through its centre of gravity Potential energy function V for the gravity force acting on the link i shown in Fig.8) Vs = ks (|rA − rB | − ls )2 2 .6) 2 2 i=1 0 0 Iiz ω iz m = 1.stands for the potential energy function Qm ... ω iy. .M (2. Hence ⎡ ⎛ ⎤⎡ ⎤⎞ I ωix X 1 £ ¤ Iix 0 0 2 ⎝ mi vi + 1 ω ix ω iy ω iz ⎣ 0 Iiy 0 ⎦ ⎣ ω iy ⎦⎠ T = (2.7) i Gi Z O X rG i rGiZ Y Figure 2 Potential energy for the spring s of stiﬀness ks and uncompressed length ls (see Fig. . 2.5) where mi .

. should be included in the generalized force Qm . . .qM ) = f (q1 . 0...qm . as such. elongation of the springs ki and kij are respectively ∆li = xi − yi ∆lij = xj − xi (2.... .. 0. . ..qm .....qm ... a non-linear mathematical model. 0.11) Dots in the above equation represents this part of the kinetic energy function that does not depend on the generalized coordinate xi . the linearization process must be carried out... Therefore.. .qM o o o f (q1 . .. 1 the kinetic energy function is 1 1 T = mi x2 + mj x2 + · · ·· ˙i ˙j 2 2 (2..0.0.qm . 4. q1 ..qM .qM . . .. . If the system takes an arbitral position that is shown in Fig. before application of the developed in this chapter methods of analysis.0) ∆qm ˙ (2. ..qm . .10) In the case of the system shown in Fig.12) .. The following formula allows for any nonlinear multi-variable function to be linearized in vicinity of the system equilibrium o o o position q1 ...9) In a general case the damping forces should be classiﬁed as non-conservative ones and. ..qm . It must be remembered that the Lagrange’s equations yield...0)+ ˙ ˙ ˙ PM ∂f o PM ∂f o o o o o + m=1 ∂qm (q1 ..qM .0.. in general case.. ..qM . . .0) ∆qm + m=1 ∂ q˙m (q1 .... ...MODELLING 70 A rA Z O X Figure 3 s B rB Y Potential energy function for all conservative forces acting on the system is V = I X i=1 Vi + S X s=1 Vs (2.

M (2. together with the gravity forces. They. the potential energy function is 1 1 V = ki (xi − yi )2 + kij (xj − xi )2 + · · ·· 2 2 (2.MODELLING 71 xj mj x i k ij mi y i (t) k i ci c ij xj k ij xi mj c ij mi xj xi ci yi y i (t) ki Figure 4 Therefore. a damping function (dissipation function) D is introduced into the Lagrange’s equation to produce the damping forces. produce resultant equal to zero. Therefore the above function does not include the potential energy due to the static deﬂection of the springs. the force produced by the dampers is included in the generalized force Qm .13 the potential energy due to gravitation must not be included in the function 2.14) . Hence. Generally. It follows that the conservative forces due to the static deﬂections can not be produced from this potential energy function. The stiﬀness k is replaced by the damping coeﬃcient c and the generalized displacements are replaced by the generalized velocities. But. very often.13 either. 2..15) (2.13 too.13 the potential energy due to gravitation must be included in the function 2. the damping function is 1 1 D = ci (xi )2 + cij (xj − xi )2 + · · ·· ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 2 The Lagrange’s equation with the damping function takes form ∂ ∂V ∂D d ∂ ( T) − T+ + = Qm dt ∂ qm ˙ ∂qm ∂qm ∂ qm ˙ m = 1. in the considered case. The damping function is created by analogy to the creation of the potential energy function.. dots stands for this part of the potential energy function that does not depend on the generalized coordinate xi . . for convenience. if the potential energy due to the static deﬂections is not included in the function 2. Hence. If the potential energy due to the static deﬂections is included in the function 2. It should be noted that the above potential energy function represents increment of the potential energy of the springs due to the displacement of the system from its equilibrium position.. since the lower end of the damper is motionless. The function D does not represent the dissipation energy but has such a property that its partial derivative produces the damping forces.13) Again.

is..17) If one apply forces along all I generalized coordinates xi along which the system is allowed to move.. Let us assume that the masses mi and mj can move along the coordinate xi and xj respectively.16) Fj mj xj xi x ij mi Figure 5 Let us consider the ﬂexible structure shown in Fig.14 into equation 2. according to the superposition principle. DEFINITION: The ratio δ ij = is called the inﬂuence coeﬃcient It can be easily proved (see Maxwell’s reciprocity theorem) that for any structure δij = δ ji (2..20) .. Let xij be the displacement of the system along the coordinate xi caused by the force Fj .13 and 2.18) xij Fj (2. 2.MODELLING 72 Introduction of the equations 2. .15 yields the equation of the motion of the mass mi . 2. xi = I X j=1 δ ij Fj i = 1. the displacement along the i − th coordinate.11. 5. Let us apply to this system a static force Fj along the coordinate xj .19) These linear relationships can be written in the matrix form x = δF (2.I (2.. mi xi + (ci + cij )xi − cij xj + (ki + kij )xi − kij xj = ki yi (t) ¨ ˙ ˙ The inﬂuence coeﬃcient method (2.

xj . k = δ −1 Hence according to equation 2.xJ ) the force that acts on the particle mi is fi = −Fi = − I X j=1 kij xj (2.21) (2.MODELLING 73 The inverse transformation permits to produce forces that have to act on the system along the individual coordinates if the system is at an arbitrarily chosen position x. F = δ −1 x The inverse matrix δ −1 is called stiﬀness matrix and will be denoted by k.. ...22) kij xj (2.21 is Fi = I X j=1 (2. application of the third Newton’s law to the particle i yields the equation of its motion in the following form mi xi + ¨ I X j=1 kij xj = 0 (2.23) If the system considered moves and its instantaneous position is determined by the vector x (x1 .25) . .24) Hence...

3 Problems Problem 16 2 1 R l Figure 6 The disk 1 of radius R.MODELLING 74 2. length l and the Young modulus E as shown in Fig.1. 6 Develop equations of motion of this system. . and mass m is attached to the massless beam 2 of radius r.

7 is governed by Newton’s equations m¨ = Fd y I ϕy = Md ¨ (2.28) y= 2EJ EJ . the corresponding displacements y and ϕy are l2 l3 Fs Fs ϕy = (2.forces acting on the disk due to its interaction with the beam The interaction forces Fd and Md can be expressed as a function of the displacements y and ϕy by means of the inﬂuence coeﬃcient method.27) y= 3EJ 2EJ If the beam is loaded with force Ms (see Fig. 8).MODELLING 75 Solution. Md . Ms ϕy = (2.moment of inertia of the disk about axis x 4 Fd . 2 Fs Ms y z ϕy l y Figure 8 If the beam is loaded with force Fs (see Fig. 2 1 R Md F d y ϕy z l Figure 7 The motion of the disk shown in Fig. the corresponding displacements y and ϕy are l l2 Ms .26) In the above mathematical model I = 1 mR2 . 8).

33) (2.29) (2.35) .31) 4 The inverse transformation yields the wanted forces as function of the displacements J= ∙ Fs Ms ¸ = ∙ l3 3EJ l2 2EJ l2 2EJ l EJ where ¸−1 ∙ y ϕy ¸ = ∙ k11 k12 k21 k22 ¸∙ y ϕy ¸ (2. x= (2. k= .MODELLING 76 Hence the total displacement along coordinates y and ϕy are y = ϕy or in matrix form ∙ y ϕy ¸ l3 Fs + 3EJ l2 = Fs + 2EJ = ∙ l3 3EJ l2 2EJ l2 2EJ l EJ l2 Ms 2EJ l Ms EJ ¸∙ Fs Ms ¸ (2.36) .30) π r4 (2.34) (2. the ﬁnal mathematical model of the system considered is m¨ + kx = 0 x where m= ∙ m 0 0 I ¸ ∙ k11 k12 k21 k22 ¸ ∙ y ϕy ¸ (2. according to the second Newton’s law ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ Fd Fs =− Md Ms the equation of motion takes the following form ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ y ¨ k11 k12 y m 0 =− ϕy ¨ ϕy 0 I k21 k22 Hence.32) Since.

. and as shown in Fig.MODELLING 77 Problem 17 G k1 l1 l2 k2 Figure 9 A rigid beam of mass m and the moments of inertia I about axis through its centre of gravity G is supported by massless springs k1 . 9. Produce equations of motion of the system.

the generalized Newton’s equations yield m¨ = F = −[(k11 + k2 )y + (k2 l2 − k1 l1 )ϕ] y 2 2 I ϕ = M = −[(k2 l2 − k1 l1 )y + (k1 l1 + yk2 l2 )ϕ ¨ The matrix form of the system equations of motion is m¨ + kx = 0 x where m= ∙ m 0 0 I ¸ .MODELLING 78 Solution.37) Hence. x= ∙ y ϕ ¸ (2. M G O y1 =y.ϕ l1 y k1 l1 F y Figure 10 The system has two degree of freedom.38) .40) (2. The force F and the moment M that act on the beam due to its motion along coordinates y and ϕ are F = = M = = −y1 k1 − y2 k2 = −(y − ϕl1 )k1 − (y + ϕl2 )k2 −[(k1 + k2 )y + (k2 l2 − k1 l1 )ϕ] +y1 k1 l1 − y2 k2 l2 = +(y − ϕl1 )k1 l1 − (y + ϕl2 )k2 l2 2 2 −[(k2 l2 − k1 l1 )y + (k1 l1 + yk2 l2 )ϕ l2 ϕ y2=y+ϕ l 2 k2 (2. k= ∙ k1 + k2 k2 l2 − k1 l1 2 2 k2 l2 − k1 l1 k1 l1 + k2 l2 ¸ . 10.39) (2. Let us then introduce the two coordinates y and ϕ as shown in Fig.

This body is hinged to the link 1 at the point A. shown in Fig. 11). The ball 2 of mass m2 and a radius r and the massless rod 4 form a rigid body. I = 2 m2 r2 – moment of inertia of the ball about axis through its centre of gravity. Use Lagrange’s approach to derive equations of small vibrations of the system about its equilibrium position. 5 . All motion is in the vertical plane.MODELLING 79 Problem 18 1 A k 3 4 2 r k R Figure 11 The link 1 of a mass m1 . can move along the horizontal slide and is supported by two springs 3 each of stiﬀness k.

12. According to Fig .44 into Eq.43) (2. 1 V = 2 kx2 − m2 gR cos ϕ (2.MODELLING 80 Solution y 1 x k o k 3 2 rG r R x ϕ Figure 12 G The system has two degree of freedom and the two generalized coordinates x and ϕ are shown in Fig. T = 1 1 1 m1 x2 + m2 (x2 + 2xRϕ cos ϕ + R2 ϕ2 ) + I ϕ2 ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 2 2 1 1 = ˙ ˙˙ ˙ (m1 + m2 )x2 + m2 Rxϕ cos ϕ + (m2 R2 + I)ϕ2 2 2 (2.42) Hence vG = rG = i(x + Rϕ cos ϕ) + j(Rϕ sin ϕ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ The required squared magnitude of this velocity is 2 ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ vG = (x + Rϕ cos ϕ)2 + (Rϕ sin ϕ)2 = x2 + 2xRϕ cos ϕ + R2 ϕ2 (2.12. 2.45) The potential energy function is due the energy stored in the springs and the energy due to gravitation.41 yields the kinetic energy function of the system as a function of the generalized coordinates x and ϕ.44) Introduction of Eq.41) The absolute velocity of the centre of gravity of the ball vG can be obtained by diﬀerentiation of its absolute position vector. The kinetic energy of the system T is equal to the sum of the kinetic energy of the link 1 T1 and the link 2 T2 .46) 2 . 1 1 1 2 T = T1 + T2 = m1 x2 + m2 vG + I ϕ2 ˙ ˙ 2 2 2 (2. 2. this position vector is rG = i(x + R sin ϕ) + j( − R cos ϕ) (2.

k= ∙ 2k 0 0 m2 gR ¸ .49) (2.53) ∂T = −m2 Rxϕ sin ϕ ˙˙ ∂ϕ ∂V = m2 gR sin ϕ ∂ϕ Hence. we have the following equations of motion x ϕ ˙ (m1 + m2 )¨ + m2 R¨ cos ϕ − m2 Rϕ2 sin ϕ + 2kx = 0 2 ϕ x (m2 R + I)¨ + m2 R¨ cos ϕ + m2 gR sin ϕ = 0 (2. the Lagrange’s equations can be adopted in the following form µ ¶ d ∂T ∂V ∂T − + = 0 dt ∂ x ˙ ∂x ∂x µ ¶ ∂T ∂V d ∂T − + = 0 (2.50) (2. sinϕ ∼ ϕ.47. according to Eq. cos ϕ ∼ 1.52) (2.56) (2. ϕ2 ∼ 0.54) For small magnitudes of x and ϕ.51) (2. x= ∙ x ϕ ¸ (2.55) . Taking this into ˙ = = = account the linearized equations of motion are x ϕ (m1 + m2 )¨ + m2 R¨ + 2kx = 0 2 ϕ x (m2 R + I)¨ + m2 R¨ + m2 gRϕ = 0 Their matrix form is m¨ + kx = 0 x where m= ∙ m1 + m2 m2 R m2 R m2 R2 + I ¸ . 2.48) (2.57) (2.47) dt ∂ ϕ ˙ ∂ϕ ∂ϕ The individual terms that appeare in the above equation are µ ¶ d d ∂T ˙ ˙ = ((m1 + m2 )x + m2 Rϕ cos ϕ) = dt ∂ x ˙ dt x ϕ ˙ = (m1 + m2 )¨ + m2 R¨ cos ϕ − m2 Rϕ2 sin ϕ ∂T =0 ∂x ∂V = 2kx ∂x d dt µ ∂T ∂ϕ ˙ ¶ = ¢ d ¡ ˙ ˙ m2 Rx cos ϕ + (m2 R2 + I)ϕ = dt ϕ x ˙˙ = (m2 R2 + I)¨ + m2 R¨ cos ϕ − m2 Rxϕ sin ϕ (2.MODELLING 81 In the case considered.

MODELLING 82 Problem 19 k q A2 k 2 l k A1 q 1 k l Figure 13 Two identical and uniform rods shown in Fig. each of mass m and length l. are joined together to form an inverse double pendulum. Produce equation of small vibrations of the pendulum about this equilibrium position. 13. . The pendulum is supported by four springs. in such way that its vertical position (q1 = 0 and q2 = 0) is its stable equilibrium position. all of stiﬀness k.

At its right hand side the particle 2 of m2 is placed. The left hand end of the massless and ﬂexible beam 4 is rigidly attached to the disk 1. Derive equations for analysis of small vibrations of the system. .MODELLING 83 Problem 20 1 3 4 2 l3 GJ o EI R l4 Figure 14 The disk 1 of mass m1 and radius R shown in Fig. 14. is fasten to the massless and ﬂexible shaft 3.

15. and G respectively. I2 . The shafts are assumed to be massless and their length the second moment of inertia and the shear modulus is denoted by l. Derive the diﬀerential equations for the torsional vibrations of the system. .MODELLING 84 Problem 21 k R R k I1 l 1 J1 G 1 I2 l 2 J2 G 2 I3 Figure 15 A belt gear was modelled as shown in Fig. The belt is modelled as the spring of a stiﬀness k. The disks have moments of inertia I1 . J. and I3 .

The shafts the gears are mounted on are massless. .MODELLING 85 Problem 22 D1 D2 I1 l 1 J1 G 1 I2 l 2 J2 G 2 I3 Figure 16 In Fig. 16 the physical model of a gear box is presented. Derive equations for the torsional vibrations of the gear box.

MODELLING

86

Problem 23

X

B l l l O 2 4 6 7

C

l

l

A

α l

Y 1 5 3

Figure 17 Fig. 17 shows a mechanical system. Link 1 of the system is motionless with respect to the inertial system of coordinates XY . The links 2 and 3 are hinged to the link 1 at the point O. The links 4 and 5 join the links 2 and 3 with the collar 6. The spring 7 has a stiﬀness k and its uncompressed length is equal to 2l. The system has one degree of freedom and its position may be determined by one generalized coordinate α. The links 4 5 and 6 are assumed to be massless. The links 2 and 3 can be treated as thin and uniform bars each of length 2l and mass m. Derive equations of the small vibration of the system about its equilibrium position.

MODELLING

87

Problem 24

l 4 m l 4 m l 4 m l 4

T

Figure 18 Three beads, each of mass m are attached to the massless string shown in Fig. 18. The string has length l and is loaded with the tensile force T. Derive equation of motion of the beads

MODELLING

88

Problem 25

m l q

1

R q

2

Figure 19 On the massless string of length l the ball of mass m and radius R is suspended (see Fig. 19). Derive equation of motion of the system.

MODELLING

89

Problem 26

I1 i

I2

I1

i

I2

c

R

k ks1 m ks2

Figure 20 Fig. 20 presents the physical model of a winch. The shafts of the torsional stiﬀness ks1 and ks2 as well as the gear of ratio i are massless. To the right hand end of the shaft ks2 the rotor of the moment of inertia I2 is attached. The left hand end of the shaft ks1 is connected to the drum of the moment of inertia I1 . The rope is modelled as a massless spring of the stiﬀness k. At its end the block of mass m is fastened. The damper of the damping coeﬃcient c represents the damping properties of the system. Produce the diﬀerential equation of motion of the system.

62) (2. ϕ1 and ϕ2 are the independant coordinates. 21 x.62 one can obtain (2.60) (2.MODELLING 90 Solution i F c R I2 I1 i I2 r2 r1 α2 F ϕ2 ϕ α1 1 k ks1 m ks2 x Figure 21 In Fig.61) (2.61 and 2.58) r2 α1 Application of the Newton’s law to the individual bodies yields equations of motion in the following form.66) (2. m¨ x ¨ I1 ϕ1 0¨ 1 α 0¨ 2 α ¨ I2 ϕ2 = = = = = −kx + Rkϕ1 +kRx − kR2 ϕ1 − cR2 ϕ1 − ks1 ϕ1 + ks1 α1 ˙ −ks1 α1 + ks1 ϕ1 + F r1 −ks2 α2 + ks2 ϕ2 − F r2 −ks2 ϕ2 + ks2 α2 0 = −ks1 α1 + ks1 ϕ1 + iF r2 0 = −ks2 iα1 + ks2 ϕ2 − F r2 Solving the above equations for α1 we have α1 = ks1 ϕ1 + iks2 ϕ2 ks1 + ks2 i2 (2.58 into the equations 2.63) Introducing 2. Since the gear of the gear ratio as well as the shafts of stiﬀness ks1 and ks2 are massless the coordinates that specify the position of the of the gear α1 and α2 are not independent.65) . They are a function of the independent coordinates. Let r1 α2 i= = (2.59) (2.64) (2.

60 and 2.58 α2 = iα1 = iks1 ϕ1 + i2 ks2 ϕ2 ks1 + ks2 i2 (2. (2.69) ⎤ x z = ⎣ ϕ1 ⎦ ϕ2 i ks1 ϕ1 + iks2 ϕ2 ks1 + ks2 i2 (2.67) Introducing 2.63 one can get the equations of motion in the following form m¨ = −kx + Rkϕ1 x I1 ϕ1 = +kRx − kR2 ϕ1 − cR2 ϕ1 − ks1 ϕ1 + ks1 ¨ ˙ ϕ2 = −ks2 ϕ2 + ks2 ¨ After standardization we have m¨ + c˙ + kz = 0 z z where ⎤ ⎡ 0 0 m 0 0 c = ⎣ 0 cR2 m = ⎣ 0 I1 0 ⎦ .66 and 2.68) iks1 ϕ1 + i2 ks2 ϕ2 ks1 + ks2 i2 ⎡ . 0 ⎤ ⎥ ⎦. 0 0 I2 i2 0 0 ⎡ k −kR 0 ⎢ −kR kR2 + ks1 ks2 i2 − ks1 ks2 i2 k = ⎣ ks1 +ks2 i2 ks1 +ks2 i2 ks1 ks2 i2 ks1 ks2 i2 0 − ks1 +ks2 i2 ks1 +ks2 i2 ⎡ ⎤ 0 0 ⎦. according to 2.MODELLING 91 Hence.67 into 2.

Produce 1. the equation of small oscillations of the semi-cylinder (take advantage of the Lagrange’s equations) Answer: ¡ ¡ ¢¢ 16 8 4 IG + mR2 1 + 9π2 − 3π α + mgR(1 − 3π )α = 0 ¨ ¡ 4 R ¢2 where IG = 1 mR2 − m 3 π 2 2. Answer: 2π T = mgR(1− 4 ) 3π 16 8 (IG +mR2 (1+ 9π2 − 3π )) . 50 is free to roll over the horizontal plane XY without slipping. The instantaneous angular position of this semi-cylinder is determined by the angular displacement α.MODELLING 92 Problem 27 Z 4R 3π z C G α R O X x Figure 22 The semi-cylinder of mass m and radius R shown in Fig. the expression for period of these oscillations.

2.70 is linear.2 ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM The analysis carried out in the previous section leads to conclusion that the mathematical model of the linear multi-degree-of -freedom system is as follows m¨ + cx + kx = F(t) x ˙ where m .2.matrix of damping k . if the mechanical structure interacts with ﬂuid or air (oil bearings.71) (2. its general solution is always equal to the sum of the general solution of the homogeneous equation xg and the particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation xp . Produce the diﬀerential equations of motion.70) . The dynamic properties of the shafts are determined by their lenghts l. Such a situation takes place.). ﬂatter of plane wings etc. for example. 51. x = xg + xp The homogeneous equation m¨ + cx + kx = 0 x ˙ (2.vector of the generalized coordinates 2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 93 Problem 28 I1 l 1 J1 G1 l 2 J2 G2 l 3 J3 G3 I2 l 4 J4 G4 Figure 23 The two disks of moments of inertia I1 and I2 are join together by means of the massless shafts as is shown in Fig.matrix of inertia c .72) (2. Since the equation 2.matrix of stiﬀness F(t). the second moments of area J and the shear modulus G.1 General case In the general case of the multi-degree-of-freedom system the matrices c and k do not necessary have to be symmetrical.vector of the external excitation x.

78) The process of searching for a solution of the equation 2.72 to so called state-space coordinates. The particular solutions corresponding to the complex roots 2..79) Their number N is equal to the number of degree of freedom of the system considered.natural frequencies.80) The equations 2. 2. The particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation 2. 2.78 have non-zero solution if and only if the characteristic determinant is equal to 0. It is often refered to as the forced vibrations. The roots rn are usually complex and conjugated. x = y ˙ y = −m−1 kx − m−1 cy ˙ The above equations can be rewritten as follows z = Az ˙ where z= ∙ x y ¸ ∙ 0 1 −m−1 k −m−1 c ¸ (2.77.N (2. Both of them can be easily solved by means of the commercially available computer programs.73 into Eq.75) (2.77 into Eq.. Therefore.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 94 corresponds to the case when the excitation F(t) is not present.81) .. |[A − 1r]| = 0 (2.80 are zn1 = ehn t (Re(z0n ) cos ωn t − Im(z0n ) sin ω n t) zn2 = ehn t (Re(z0n ) sin ω n t + Im(z0n ) cos ω n t) n = 1.79 is called eigenvalue problem and the process of searching for the corresponding vector z0 is called eigenvector problem.70 represents the vibrations caused by the excitation force F(t).. rn = hn ± iω n n = 1.stability of the equilibrium position To analyze the free vibrations let us transfer the homogeneous equation 2. 2. its general solution represents the free (natural) vibrations of the system.77) Introduction of Eq.. z = z0 ert (2..75 results in a set of the homogeneous algebraic equations which are linear with respect to the vector z0 .N (2. [A − 1r] z0 = 0 (2.74) .76) Solution of the above equation can be predicted in the form 2.72 yields the following set of the diﬀerential equations of ﬁrst order. Let y=x ˙ (2.. 2.. Introduction of Eq.73) be the vector of the generalized velocities. Free vibrations . A= (2.

zn1 .6 z 1 z h>0 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 95 In the above expressions Re(z0n ) and Im(z0n ) stand for the real and imaginary part of the complex and conjugated eigenvector z0n associated with the nth root of the set 2.80 allow the stability of the system equilibrium position to be determined.. .1 1.4 1.2 1.81 allow to formulate the general solution that approximates the system free vibrations...2 0.4 0. this problem is diﬃcult and goes beyond the scope of this lectures.The problem of searching for the vector of the 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 0. zn2.. the imaginary parts of roots rn represent the natural frequencies of the system and their real parts represent rate of decay of the free vibrations. 24 for the positive and negative magnitude of hn .81.3 1...2 1.7 0.80 respectively.2 -0.6 0.6 t T n = 2 π /ω n -0.1 0.82 indicates that the free motion of a multidegree-of-freedom system is a linear combination of the solutions 2. z32. m¨ + cx + kx = F(t) x ˙ (2. If at least one root of the equation 2.zN1 ...5 1..7 0. The particular solutions 2.2 0 h<0 t -0. k k f k = Fo cos(ωt + ϕk ) + iFo sin(ωt + ϕk ) (2.8 0. z22. The roots 2.8 0. .3 1.3 0. let us introduce the complex excitation force by adding to the expression 2..6 -0. In the general case.4 0.81 is given in Fig.6 0.transfer functions The response to the external excitation F(t) of a multi-degree-of-freedom system is determined by the particular solution of the mathematical model 2.9 1 1. zN 2 ] C (2.5 1.1 1.81.84 the imaginary part.1 0.4 0.5 0.3 0. A graphical interpretation of the solutions 2.70.80 have negative real parts then the equilibrium position of the system considered is stable.85) o o .8 T n = 2 π /ω n Figure 24 constant magnitudes C is called initial problem. Forced vibrations .5 0.83) Let us assume that the excitation force F(t) is a sum of K addends.4 1.82) As one can see from the formulae 2.6 0. The system with N degree of freedom possesses N natural frequencies. The equation 2. For the further analysis let us assume that each of them has the following form k F k = Fo cos(ωt + ϕk ) o (2.2 0.80 has positive real part then the equilibrium position of the system considered is unstable.83..8 0. z31 . If all roots rn of the equation 2. z12.84) To facilitate the process of looking for the particular solution of equation 2...9 1 1. z21 . z = [z11 .4 0.

88 (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 96 The relationship between the complex excitation f k and the real excitation is shown in Fig.88) . Introduction of Eq.83 yields m¨ + cx + kx = fo eiωt x ˙ xc = aeiωt (2. 2.86 into Eq.86) k Here. 2. 2. 25.87 can be predicted in the complex form 2. fo is a complex number that depends on the amplitude and phase of the external excitation.87) Now. According to Euler’s formula the complex excitation may be rewritten as Im f k F 0 k k ϕ0 ωt ω F cos( t+ ϕ 0 ) 0 k k Re k ϕ0 F k ω t F 0 k ω t Figure 25 follows k k k f k = Fo ei(ωt+ϕo ) = Fo eiϕo eiωt = fo eiωt k k (2. the particular solution of Eq.

according to 2.87 produces set of the algebraic equations which are linear with respect to the unknown vector a.91) Response of the system x due to the real excitation F is represented by the real part of the solution 2. It transfers.96) It is easy to see from 2. 2.90.92) Motion of the system considered along the coordinate xk . 2.89) −ω m + iωc + k a = fo ¢− 1 ¡ fo a = −ω2 m + iωc + k (2. the vector of the complex excitation fo eiωt into the vector of the complex displacement xc = aeiωt . according to Eq.90) Therefore.91 that the amplitude of the forced vibration xk is equal to the o absolute value of the complex amplitude ak . 2. .94) will be denoted by R(iω) and it is called matrix of transfer functions. Example of three elements of a matrix of the transform functions are presented in Fig. according to 2.91. the response of the system xc due to the complex force f is xc = (Re(a) + i Im(a))(cos ωt + i sin ωt) (2. The ﬁrst two diagrams present the real and the imaginary parts of the complex transform functions whereas the last two present its absolute value (amplitude) and phase. The complex matrix ¢− 1 ¡ 2 (2. 27. 26. This ﬁndings are presented in Fig. and its phase β k is equal to the phase between the complex amplitudes ak and the vector eiωt . x = Re(a) cos ωt − Im(a) sin ωt (2. ¢ ¡ 2 (2.95) −ω m + iωc + k It is easy to see that the element Rpq (iω) of the matrix of transfer functions represents the complex displacement (amplitude and phase) of the system along the coordinates xp caused by the unit excitation 1eiωt along the coordinate xq .88.88 into Eq.93) (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 97 Its solution is Introduction of Eq. xc = aeiωt = R(iω)fo eiωt (2.92 is xk = xk cos(ωt + β k ) o where xk = o p Re(ak )2 + Im(ak )2 β k = arc tan Im(ak ) Re(ak ) (2.

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 98 Im f F 0 k k ϕ0 k a x0 k k k β0 ωt k F cos(ω t+ ϕ 0 ) 0 k Re x0 cos( ω t+ β 0 ) k k ϕ0 k β0 k F k k ω t F 0 x0 k k x ω t Figure 26 .

001 0.0001 0 -0.0001 -0.001 -0.0006 0.002 -0.1) R(1.3) transfer function m/N (imaginary part) 0.0035 0.002 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 99 transfer functions m/N (real parts) 0.002 0.0025 0.0015 0.003 0.2) R(1.3) (phase) 1500 frequency rad/s Figure 27 .003 -0.0005 0 0 500 1000 1500 frequency rad/s R(1.001 0 -0.2) R(1.1) R(1.0004 0.004 500 1000 1500 frequency rad/s R(1.1) R(1.1) R(1.3) transfer function m/N (modulus) 0.2) R(1.2) R(1.0002 0.0005 0.3) transfer functions m/N 4 2 0 -2 -4 500 1000 R(1.0003 0.0002 -0.0003 500 1000 1500 frequency rad/s R(1.003 0.

Fourier transformation applied to these functions Z +∞ Fq (iω) = e−iωt Fq (t)dt −∞ Z +∞ e−iωt xp (t)dt (2. 28) let us apply force Fq (t) along the coordinate xq and record it simultaneously with the system response xp (t) along the coordinate xp . The amplitude of the complex functions xp (iω) and Fq (iω) q Re(xp (iω))2 + Im(xp (iω))2 |xp (iω)| = q |Fq (iω)| = Re(Fq (iω))2 + Im(Fq (iω))2 (2.98) .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 100 Experimental determination of the transfer functions Fq xq xp xp F(t) q Fq ( iω ) t Fourier R (iω ) i pq ω x( iω ) p x(t) p t x( iω ) p ___ Fq ( iω ) transformation ω ω Figure 28 In order to produce the transfer function between the coordinate xp and the coordinate xq (see Fig.97) xp (iω) = −∞ yields the Fourier transforms in the frequency domain xp (iω) and Fq (iω).

N ) allows to formulate the matrix of the transfer functions Rpq (iω)... the response along the coordinate xp caused by set of forces acting along coordinates N coordinates xq .N...100) The above formula determines response of the system along coordinate xp caused by the harmonic excitation Fq along the coordinate xq .99) These Fourier transforms allow the transfer function Rpq (iω) to be computed. Rpq (iω) = xp (iω) Fq (iω) (2.N (2..103) .N (2. ϕxp = arctan ϕF q Im(xp (iω)) Re(xp (iω)) Im(Fq (iω)) = arctan Re(Fq (iω)) (2. according to the superposition principle...ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 101 represents the amplitude of displacement and force respectively as a function of the frequency ω.. is q=N xp (iω) = X q=1 Rpq (iω)Fq (iω) q = 1. The corresponding phases are determined by the following formulae..The relationship above can be rewritten in the following matrix form x(iω) = Rpq (iω)F(iω) p = 1. q = 1.102) Application of the above described experimental procedure to all coordinates involved in the modelling (p = 1... xp (iω) = Rpq (iω)Fq (iω) (2..101) Since the system considered is by assumption linear.

± ω N (2.. introduction of Eq.108 becomes linearly dependent and therefore has inﬁnite number of solution Xn . 2. Size of these matrices is N × N where N is the number of the system degree of freedom. They are called natural frequencies.104) Free vibration of the undamped system .108 too.109) The above characteristic equation.105.105 yields (2.2 Modal analysis . Indeed.eigenvalue and eigenvector problem If the damping is neglected the equation of the free vibrations is m¨ + kx = 0 x It is easy to see that x = X cos ωt (2.. ±ω2 .. Hence.110) As one can see from Eq.. ± ω n . these parameters have the physical meaning only for positive values. c and k are square and symmetrical. Its follows that if Xn is a solution of Eq.106. has N positive roots with respect to the parameter ω2 .. ±ω3 .105 is fulﬁlled for any instant of time if the following set of the homogeneous algebraic equations is fulﬁlled. 2. If the vector of the external excitation F(t) is equal to zero.111) where Cn is arbitrarily chosen constant.107) (−ω 2 m + k)X cos ωt = 0 and the diﬀerential equation 2.case of small damping In the following analysis it will be assumed that the matrices m. The number of diﬀerent natural frequencies is therefore equal to the number of degree of freedom. They represent frequencies of the system free vibrations.2.106 into 2. .106) is a particular solution of the equation 2. (−ω2 m + k)X = 0 (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 102 2. the above set of equations has the non-zero solutions if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero ¯ ¯ 2 ¯−ω m + k¯ = 0 (2. it is said that the system performs free vibrations. is solution of the Eq.. the vector Cn Xn (2. According to the above deﬁnition the free vibrations are governed by the homogeneous set of equations m¨ + cx + kx = 0 x ˙ (2.108) (2. For each of the possible natural frequencies ωn the system of equations 2..108. 2. the parameter ω can take any of the following values ±ω1 . . 2. for any physical system. The vector Xn represents so called natural mode of vibration associated with the natural .105) In turn.

105 has been accomplished. Now.105 xn = N X (Sn Xn sin ω n t + Cn Xn cos ωn t) n=1 (2. Since the solutions ?? and 2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 103 frequency ω n .112) If the system is deﬂected according to the this vector and allowed to move with the x3n = X 3n cosω n t x X 1n X 2n X 3n X 4n t Tn Figure 29 initial velocity equal to zero. one can say that the process of determination of the particular solution xn = Xn cos ω n t (2.114) is a particular solution too. .115) The 2N constants Sn and Cn should be chosen to satisfy the 2N initial conditions. their linear combination forms the general solution of the equation 2. For example. it will oscillate with the frequency ω n . X2n . In similar manner one can prove that xn = Xn sin ω n t (2. Therefore the natural frequencies are very often referred to as eigenvalue and the natural modes as eigenvectors. It determines the shape that the system must possess to oscillate harmonically with the frequency ω n . 29) the vector Xn contains four numbers Xn = [X1n . X4n ]T (2. There are four such a natural modes and four corresponding natural frequencies for this system. The problem of the determination of the natural frequencies is called eigenvalue problem and searching for the corresponding natural modes is called eigenvector problem.113) of the equation 2. if a beam with four concentrated masses is considered (see Fig.114 are linearly independent. X3n . There are N such particular solutions.

Hence.118) (2.116) Primultiplying the ﬁrst equation by XT and the second equation by XT one can get m n (2. . −ω 2 mXn +kXn = 0 n −ω2 mXm +kXm = 0 m −ω 2 XT mXn +XT kXn = 0 m n m T 2 T −ω m Xn mXm +Xn kXm = 0 Since matrices m and k are symmetrical XT kXn = XT kXm m n and XT mXn = XT mXm m n (2.117 by -1 and then adding them together we are getting (2. 2. According to 2.119) (ω 2 − ω2 )XT mXm = 0 n m n Since for n 6= m (ω2 − ω2 ) 6= 0. Let us denot it by Ξn Ξn = 1 Xn λn (2. primultiplying the ﬁrst equation of set 2.124) n Taking into account Eq’s 2.120) If n = m.121) 1 1 T Xn )m( Xn ) = 1 λn λn (2. n m XT mXm = 0 for n 6= m n (2.111 1 X λn n (2. ΞT mΞn = 1 (2.123) The process of producing of the eigenvectors Ξn is called normalization and the eigenvector Ξn is called normalized eigenvector or normalized mode.108. Each eigenvector has to fulﬁll the Eq. since (ω 2 − ω 2 ) = 0.122.125) It is said that eigenvectors Ξn and Ξm that fulﬁll the above conditions are orthogonal with respect to the inertia matrix m. the product XT mXn does not have to be equal to n n n zero.117) Now. Let this product be equal to λ2 n XT mXn = λ2 n n Division of the above equation by λ2 yields n ( But according to 2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 104 Properties of the natural modes.122) is eigenvector too.120 and 2.124 one can conclude that ½ ¾ 0 if n 6= m T Ξn mΞm = 1 if n = m (2.

.. ω2 N Normal coordinates . ω2 .. 0 . 0 . 2.117 yields ½ ¾ 0 if n 6= m T Ξn kΞm = (2.ΞN ] where N is number of degrees of freedom (2. 0 ω2 . The modal modes Ξn can be arranged in a square matrix of order N known as the modal matrix Ξ . 2 ω =⎢ ⎢ 0 ⎢ ⎣ .. ⎦ 0 . . the second of the equations 2. c =µm+κk (2. 0 (2. in turn. 0 ⎥ 2 ⎥ .. But in case of absence of such devices. . . particularly if the system considered is furnished with special devices design for dissipation of energy called dampers. . 0 . In many cases. Vibrations of any mechanical structures are coupled with deﬂections of the elastic elements. .Ξn .130) This coeﬃcients are to be determined experimentally.104) is assumed as the following combination of the matrix of inertia m and stiﬀness k with the unknown coeﬃcients µ and κ. Ξ = [Ξ1 .. Ξ2 . .129) 0 . the structural damping can be omitted.. In such cases the matrix of damping c (see Eq. The damping caused by such an internal friction and damping due to friction of these elements against the surrounding medium is usually referred to as the structural damping.. cause friction between the particles the elements are made of.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 105 It means that the normalized modes are orthogonal with respect to the matrix of stiﬀness. ⎥ ⎥ (2.128) containing the squared natural frequencies ω 2 n ⎤ 0 ..126) ω 2 if n = m n It is easy to see that the developed orthogonality conditions yields ΞT mΞ = 1 ΞT kΞ = ω2 where ω 2 is a square diagonal matrix ⎡ 2 ω1 ⎢ 0 ⎢ ⎢ .modal damping Motion of any real system is always associated with a dissipation of energy. . the structural damping has to be taken into account. It will be shown that application of the following linear transformation x = Ξη (2.127) Owning to the above orthogonality condition.. . . 0 ⎥ n ⎥ . These deﬂections. The structural damping is extremely diﬃcult or simply impossible to be predicted by means of any analytical methods.131) .

0 η n + 2ς n ω n η n + ω2 η n = Ξqn Fq eiωt ¨ ˙ n n = 1.136) The coeﬃcients ς n = (µ+κω 2 )/2ω n are often referred to as the modal damping ratio.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 106 to the mathematical model m¨ + cx + kx = F(t) x ˙ (2. Problem of determination of this particular solution is considered in the next section. ⎥ ⎢ (2.diagonal matrices n n Hence.132 yields mΞ¨ + cΞη + kΞη = F(t) η ˙ (2. n Solution of each of the above equations can be obtained independently and according to the discussion carried out in the ﬁrst chapter (page 30.131 into 2.N ¨ ˙ n n (2.136 for response of the system due to the harmonic excitation along coordinate xq .134) Taking advantage of the orthogonality conditions 2.46) can be written as follows η n = e−ς n ωn t (Csn sin ωdn t + Ccn cos ω dn t) + η pn (2.. Indeed. Introduction of the solutions 2.N (2.136. introduction of the transformation 2.136 takes form ⎤ ⎡ 0 ⎥ ⎢ . 2.137) p where ω dn = ω n 1 − ς 2 and η pn stands for the particular solution of the nonn homogeneous equation 2.the unit matrix ω2 and γ = (µ1+κω 2 ) . 2...131 yields motion of the system along the physical coordinates x. each equation of the above set has the following form η n + 2ς n ωn η n + ω2 η n = ΞT F(t) n = 1. Response to the harmonic excitation .132) results in its decoupling.. 1. .139) Hence . In this case the right hand side of the equation 2.transfer functions Let us solve the Eq.135) n where 1 . 2.133) Primultiplying both sides of the above equation by ΞT we obtain ΞT mΞ¨ + ΞT (µm+κk)Ξη + ΞT kΞη = ΞT F(t) η ˙ (2.128 we are getting set of independent equations 1¨ + γ η + ω 2 η = ΞT F(t) η ˙ (2. Eq.137 into equation 2.138) ΞT F(t) = ΞT ⎢ Fq eiωt ⎥ = Ξqn Fq eiωt n n ⎢ ⎥ ⎦ ⎣ . .

2.. 2..146) Alternatively. It can be seen from the equation 2..N (2.145 that the real part of the transfer function Rpq (iω) is equal to zero for the frequency equal to the natural frequency ω n . . Hence the zero-points of the real part of the transfer functions determine the system natural frequencies. .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 107 Therefore ηn = Since Ξqn Fq eiωt 2 − ω 2 + 2ς ω ωi ωn n n x = Ξη n = 1.144) q = 1..140) (2. ..N..N (ω2 −ω 2 )2 +4ς 2 ω 2 ω2 n n n (2..N (2. 2..147) This property allows the natural frequencies to be determined. since the real part of the transfer function is equal to zero for ω = ω n ... ....... From the same equation it is apparent that the imaginary parts corresponding to ω ∼ ωn and measured for diﬀer= ent q = 1. natural modes and the modal damping to be identiﬁed. . 2.145) Determination of natural frequencies and modes from the transfer functions The transfer functions Rpq (iω) can be easily obtained by means of a simple experiment (see page 100).N (2.. .142) transfer function between coordinate p and the others X Ξpn Ξqn xp = iωt 2 − ω 2 + 2ς ω ωi Fq e ω n n n=1 n N q = 1.. 2.141) response along coordinate xp xp = e iωt N X ω2 n=1 n Ξpn Ξqn Fq − ω2 + 2ς n ω n ωi (2. is equal to ±90o ϕn = arctan Im (Rpq (iω n )) = ± arctan ∞ = ±90o Re (Rpq (iω n )) (2... The natural frequencies and the natural modes can be extracted from diagrams of the magnitudes and phases of the transfer function. They allow the natural frequencies. 2...143) = if ω ∼ ωn = Rpq (iω) = Fqxp = eiωt PN ³ Ξpn Ξqn (ω2 −ω2 ) n n=1 (ω 2 −ω 2 )2 +4ς 2 ω2 ω 2 n n n PN + Ξpn Ξqn (ω 2 − ω 2 ) −Ξpn Ξqn i n Rpq (iω) ∼ + = 4ς 2 ω 2 ω 2 2ς n ω n ω n n Ξpn Ξqn ((ω 2 −ω2 )−2ς n ωn ωi) n = n=1 (ω2 −ω 2 )2 +4ς 2 ω 2 ω2 n ´n n −2Ξpn Ξqn ς n ω n ωi q = 1...... The phase ϕ. but for the same p yield the natural modes with accuracy to the ω2 constant magnitude C = − 2ς npnn Ξ Ξnq = C Im(Rpq (iω n )) q = 1..... ..N (2.

N (2...00015 0.. 30 transfer functions m/N (modulus) 0..00025 0.. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ Ξpn ¯ (2.00005 0 1500 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 1500 1600 1700 1800 frequency rad/s 2 1 3 R(1..150) where Signe of the idividual elements Ξnq of the mode n is deremined by signe of the corresponding phase ϕn = ±90o An example of extracting the natural frequency and the corresponding natural mode from the transfer functions is shown in Fig. its modulus is equal to the absolute value of imaginary part. .2) R(1.3) natural mode ¯ ¯ ¯ 2ς n ω2 ¯ n¯ ¯ C=¯ Ξpn ¯ transfer functions m/N (phase) π/2 natural frequency −π/2 Figure 30 The demonstated in this chapter approach for solution of the vibration problems is referred to as modal analysis.1) R(1.3) 1600 1700 1800 frequency rad/s R(1.0001 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 108 Hence Since the real part of the transfer function is equal to zero for ω = ω n . 2.1) R(1.2) R(1.148) Ξqn ¯ |Rpq (iω)| = ¯ ¯ 2ς n ω 2 n Ξnq = C |Rpq (iω)| q = 1.149) (2. .0002 0.

..152 fulﬁlls the requirement 2.........151) Performing the matrix multiplication we are getting ⎧ Pm=N ⎫ ˙ ⎪ ⎪ m=1 m1m xm ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ .....152) (2..1.. If T is the kinetic energy function...........2.. ..mnn ......... . ⎪ ⎪ ⎝ ⎝ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ P ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ m=N ⎩ ⎭ mNm xm ˙ m=1 !! Ã Ãm=N m=N X X d 1 = mnm xm + ˙ mmn xm ˙ dt 2 m=1 m=1 If this function is positive deﬁnite (is always positive and is equal to zero if and only if all variables xn are equal to zero) the corresponding matrix m is called positive ˙ deﬁnite matrix.. ⎪ Ã m=N ! ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ P ⎬ 1 n=N X X 1 m=N = T = xn ˙ {x1 . the potential energy function and the dissipation function are formulated for a linear system governed by the equation m¨ + cx + kx = F(t) x ˙ where the matrices m..3 Kinetic and potential energy functions ...153) ˙ m x ˙ ⎪ m=1 nm m ⎪ 2 n=1 2 ⎪ .. Kinetic energy function Let us consider function 1 T = xT mx x = {x1 . ⎪ m=1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ P ⎪ ⎩ m=N ⎭ ˙ m=1 mNm xm = n=N m=N 1X X mnm xn xm ˙ ˙ 2 n=1 m=1 Let us prove that the function 2..... mNn (2....154) − = {mn1 .....xN }T ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 (2.....xN } ˙ ˙ ˙ mnm xm (2. ⎪ ⎪ ¶ µ ⎨ ⎬ d ∂T ∂T ¨ (2....mnN } xn ⎪ dt ∂ xn ˙ ∂xn ⎪ ..... ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎜ ⎜ ⎨ P ⎨ ⎬ d ⎜1 ⎜ m=N ⎜ ⎜{0.... mmn ....xn .. ¶ µ d ∂T ∂T − dt ∂ xn ˙ ∂xn ⎧ Pm=N ⎧ ⎫ ⎛ ⎛ ˙ ⎪ ⎪ m=1 m1m xm ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ .... c and k are symmetric and positive deﬁnite matrices......155) .xn .....0} + {x1 . ....Dissipation function In this section the kinetic energy function..........xn . ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎭ xN ¨ ⎫⎞⎞ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪⎟⎟ ⎪ ⎬⎟⎟ ⎟⎟ = ⎪⎟⎟ ⎪⎠⎠ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ m1n . according to Lagrange’s equations should be ⎧ ⎫ ⎪ x1 ⎪ ⎪ ¨ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ... ..xN } ˙ = ˙ ˙ m x ˙ ⎪ m=1 nm m ⎪ ⎪ dt ⎜ 2 ⎜ ⎪ .154......... 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 109 2.

..xn ..xN }T (2.. 1 V = xT kx x = {x1 .. kmn ........... m=1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ xN ¨ Potential energy function Let us consider function (2...160) . . ⎪ ⎪ ⎝ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ P ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ m=N ⎩ ⎭ kNm xm m=1 ! Ãm=N m=N X X 1 = knm xm + kmn xm 2 m=1 m=1 k1n .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 110 Since mnm = mmn ! ! Ã m=N Ãm=N ¶ µ d X d ∂T ∂T d 1 X − 2 = mnm xm = ˙ mnm xm ˙ dt ∂ xn ˙ ∂xn dt 2 m=1 dt m=1 ⎧ ⎪ x1 ⎪ ¨ ⎪ ⎪ m=N ⎨ ..159. ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎭ xN Let us prove that the function 2.knn .mnn ........knN } xn ⎪ ⎪ ∂xn ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ .... ⎧ Pm=N ⎧ ⎫ ⎛ ⎪ m=1 k1m xm ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ..........156) ⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ Now we may conclude that the function 2...xN } = k x ⎪ m=1 nm m ⎪ ⎪ ∂xn 2⎜ ⎪ .... 0........ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎜ ⎨ P ⎨ ⎬ ∂V 1⎜ m=N ⎜{0.1.... ⎪ Ã m=N ! ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ P ⎬ 1 n=N X X 1 m=N = V = xn {x1 ....157) 2 Performing the matrix multiplication we are getting ⎧ Pm=N ⎫ ⎪ m=1 k1m xm ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ .. x2 ...........152 is the kinetic energy function if the matrix m is symmetric and positive deﬁnite...............xn .... ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎬ ∂V (2......... ⎪ m=1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ P ⎪ ⎩ m=N ⎭ ˙ m=1 kNm xm = If V is the potential energy function..... kN n ⎫⎞ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪⎟ ⎪ ⎬⎟ ⎟= ⎪⎟ ⎪⎠ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ n=N m=N 1X X knm xn xm 2 n=1 m=1 (2.xN } knm xm (2.... .. X ¨ = mnm xm = {mn1 .mnN } xn ¨ ⎪ ⎪ ..........0} + {x1 ....xn .....158) k x ˙ ⎪ m=1 nm m ⎪ 2 n=1 2 ⎪ .....157 fulﬁlls the requirement 2..... it must be positive deﬁnite and according to Lagrange’s equations should fulﬁlls the following relationship ⎧ ⎫ ⎪ x1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ . .....159) = {kn1 ........

. m=1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ xN ⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ (2.... ..157 is the kinetic energy function if the matrix k is symmetric and positive deﬁnite. m=N m=N ⎨ X X ∂V 1 = 2 knm xm = knm xm = {kn1 .161) Now we may conclude that the function 2. ....xn .. having in mind the previous consideration. in a general case.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 111 Since knm = kmn ⎧ ⎪ x1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ .cnN } xn ⎪ ∂ xn ˙ ⎪ ....knn ... are not conservative and have to be included in the generalized force Qn . . that the function 1 D = xT cx x = {x1 .......162) (2. ........xN }T ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 fulﬁlls the following relationship ⎧ ⎪ x1 ⎪ ˙ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ .. ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ xN ˙ ⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ (2.knN } xn ⎪ ∂xn 2 m=1 ⎪ ....cnn ..... Dissipation function It is easy to notice... such a damping can be included in the Lagrange’s equation in the following way ¶ µ d ∂T ∂T ∂V ∂D − + + = Qn (2...163) It follows that if the matrix of damping is symmetrical and positive deﬁnite....... It must be noted that the dissipation function does not represent the dissipation energy.... ∂D ˙ = {cn1 .164) dt ∂ xn ˙ ∂xn ∂xn ∂ xn ˙ The function D is called dissipation function.. The damping forces..

2 · 1012 N/m2 J1 = 1 · 10−8 m4 m1 = 10kg l2 = 2m E2 = 0.165) y = A1 sin(f1 t) + A2 sin(f2 t) where A1 and A2 are amplitudes of this motion and f1 and f2 are the corresponding frequencies. the diﬀerential equations of motion 2. the steady state motion of the system due to the kinematic excitation y 4. .2.2 · 1012 N/m2 J2 = 1 · 10−8 m4 m2 = 20kg k = 10000N/m c = 100Ns/m A1 = 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 112 2. Produce 1.01m f1 = 30rad/s A2 = 0. 31 moves according to the following equation (2.4 Problems Problem 29 l 1 J1 E 1 B J2 E 2 l2 2 A y k m2 l2 2 m1 c Figure 31 The point A of the system shown in Fig. Given are: l1 = 1m E1 = 0.01m f2 = 35rad/s . the natural frequencies 3. the reaction force and the reaction moment at the point B. the exciting force at the point A required to maintain the steady state motion 5.

167) + + = c cy ˙ −k k + k2 m2 y2 ¨ y2 ˙ y2 or shorter m¨ + cy + ky = F(t) y ˙ where m= ∙ m1 0 0 m2 ¸ . k= ∙ k + k1 −k −k k + k2 ¸ . F(t) = ∙ ¸ 0 cy ˙ (2.168) Taking into consideration Eq. a2 = cA2 f2 Introduction of Eq.170) (2. 32 allows to develop its mathematical model.166) Its matrix form is ¸∙ ¸ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ∙ y1 ˙ y1 ¨ 0 k + k1 y1 0 −k m1 (2.168 yields m¨ + cy + ky = F1 (t) + F2 (t) y ˙ (2. The diﬀerential equations of motion l 1 J1 E 1 B J2 E 2 l2 2 A y k m1 y m2 1 l2 2 c y2 Figure 32 Utilization of the Newton-Euler approach for modelling of the system shown in Fig.165. the excitation cy is ˙ cy = cA1 f1 cos(f1 t) + cA2 f2 cos(f2 t) = a1 cos(f1 t) + a2 cos(f2 t) ˙ where a1 = cA1 f1 . c= ∙ 0 0 0 c ¸ . ¨ m1 y1 = −k1 y1 − ky1 + ky2 m2 y2 = −k2 y2 − ky2 + ky1 − cy2 + cy ¨ ˙ ˙ (2. 2.171) . 2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 113 Solution 1.169) (2.170 into the equation of motion 2.

the natural frequencies To analyze the free vibrations let us transfer the homogeneous equation 2.178) 0 ⎦ −5 (2. 483i ω 2 = −0. .172) The stiﬀness of the beam 2 at the point of attachment of the mass 2 is k2 = Hence ¸ 10 0 m= .171 to the state-space coordinates. The substitution w=y ˙ results in the following set of equations z = Az ˙ where ∙ y w ¸ ∙ 0 1 −m−1 k −m−1 c ¸ 0 ⎢ 0 =⎢ ⎣ −1600. 8259 ± 45.177) (2. A= Solution of the eigenvalue problem yields the following complex roots ω 1 = −1.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 114 where F1 (t) = For the given numerical data the stiﬀness of the beam 1 at the point of attachment of the mass 1 is k1 = 3E1 J1 3 · 0. 734i (2. 6741 ± 24.174) (2. Free motion .2 · 1012 · 1 · 10−8 = = 6000N/m 3 l1 13 (2. 0 20 ∙ F1 (t) = ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 0 0 16000 −10000 c= . k= 0 ¸ 100 ∙ −10000 22000 ¸ 0 0 .179) For underdamped system the imaginary part of the above roots represents the natural frequency of the damped system. The real part indicates the rate of decay of the free vibrations.0 500 ⎡ 0 0 1000 −1100 1 0 0 0 ⎤ 0 1 ⎥ ⎥ (2.175) 2.173) ∙ 0 a1 cos(f1 t) ¸ .176) z= . F2 (t) = ∙ 0 a2 cos(f2 t) ¸ (2. F2 (t) = 30 cos(30t) 35 cos(35t) ∙ 48E2 J2 48 · 0.2 · 1012 · 1 · 10−8 = = 12000N/m 3 l2 23 (2.

8259t (1. 26033 . Example of the motion along the coordinate y1 . 483t − ⎢ −1. 4508 × 10−2 −1. The two last rows represents the generalized velocities along the coordinates y1 and y2 . 049 × 10−3 1. 7637 × 10−2 ⎥ ⎥ cos 24.181) The two ﬁrst rows in the above solutions represent displacement along the coordinates y1 and y2 respectively. 6392 × 10−2 cos 24. 46561 ⎤ ⎞ z12 = eh1 t (Re(z01 ) sin ω 1 t + Im(z01 ) cos ω1 t) = ⎡ ⎛⎡ ⎤ −1. 7637 × 10−2 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ . 734t⎟ ⎠ ⎦ (2. 9755 × 10−2 −6. 40969 z21 = eh2 t (Re(z02 ) cos ω2 t − Im(z02 ) sin ω2 t) = ⎡ ⎛⎡ ⎤ −6. 6741t ⎜⎢ ⎣ ⎝⎣ ⎦ . 40969 ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ 1. the particular solutions are Solution of the eigenvector problem produces the following complex vectors. 049 × 10−3 −3 ⎥ ⎢ −1.180) Re z02 = ⎢ ⎣ ⎣ ⎦ ⎦ . 734t + 6. 46561 z11 = eh1 t (Re(z01 ) cos ω1 t − Im(z01 ) sin ω1 t) = ⎡ ⎛⎡ ⎤ −1. 483t) y211 = e−0. 734t + ⎢ 1. Im z01 = ⎢ −1.182) are presented in Fig 33. 6741t (−1. 4508 × 10−2 sin 24. 734t − ⎢ = e−0. 7637 × 10 ⎥ sin 24. 9162 × 10 −. 734t) (2. 477 × 10−3 ⎜⎢ −1. 35302 −. 90847 −2 −5. 9162 × 10 −. 483t⎟ ⎠ ⎦ ⎞ ⎤ ⎟ ⎥ ⎥ cos 24. 477 × 10 ⎥ (2. 4508 × 10−2 −1. 38263 −. 35302 −. 9162 × 10 −. 734t⎟ ⎠ ⎦ ⎞ ⎟ ⎥ ⎥ cos 45. 483t + ⎢ −1. 9755 × 10−2 −3 ⎢ ⎜⎢ −1. 483t⎟ ⎠ ⎦ ⎞ ⎤ ⎟ ⎥ ⎥ sin 45. Im z02 = ⎢ 1. 37705 . 0154 × 10−2 ⎥ ⎥ cos 45. 483t + 1. 9755 × 10−2 cos 45. 38263 −. 4508 × 10−2 −2 ⎥ ⎢ −1. 26033 . 0154 × 10−2 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ . 6392 × 10−2 −2 ⎥ −2 ⎢ ⎜⎢ −1.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 115 According to 2. 9755 × 10−2 ⎢ 1. 37705 . 049 × 10−3 1. 40969 ⎤ ⎟ ⎥ ⎥ sin 24. 6741t ⎜⎢ ⎣ ⎝⎣ ⎦ . ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ −1. 477 × 10 = e−0. 6392 × 10−2 −2 ⎢ ⎜⎢ −1. 0154 × 10−2 ⎥ ⎥ sin 45. 6392 × 10−2 −1. 26033 . 049 × 10−3 sin 45. 46561 z22 = eh2 t (Re(z02 ) sin ω 2 t + Im(z02 ) cos ω2 t) = ⎡ ⎛⎡ ⎤ −6. 3213 × 10 = e−1. 3213 × 10 ⎥ Re z01 = ⎢ ⎣ ⎣ ⎦ ⎦ . 90847 −2 −5. 8259t ⎜⎢ ⎣ ⎝⎣ ⎦ . 37705 . 3213 × 10 = e−1. 35302 −. 8259t ⎜⎢ ⎣ ⎝⎣ ⎦ . 90847 −2 −5. associated with the particular solution z11 (y111 ) and z21 (y211 ) y111 = e−1. 38263 −. .81.

01 0 -0.01 1 2 3 4 t[s] -0.01 1 2 3 4 t[s] -0.01 0 -0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 116 y111[m] 0.02 y211[m] 0.02 Figure 33 .

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 117 3.184) where y1 is the particular solution of the equation 2.183) 0. The steady state motion of the system due to the kinematic excitation According to the given data. motion of the point A is y = 0.188) (2. 34 The particular solution y.189) .5 t[s] -0.01 0 -0.187) = F10 e = 30 Hence the equation of motion takes form m¨ + cy + ky = F10 eif1 t y ˙ Its particular solution is c c y1 = y10 eif1 t (2. according to the superposition rule.02 Figure 34 The time history diagram of this motion is given in Fig.01 · sin(35 · t) y[m] (2.185) To produce the particular solution of the equation 2.186) (2.5 1 1.185 m¨ + cy + ky = F1 (t) y ˙ and y2 is the particular solution of the equation 2. is y = y1 + y2 (2.01 · sin(30 · t) + 0.185 let us introduce the complex excitation ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ 0 0 0 c = = eif1 t = F1 (t) = a1 eif1 t a1 a1 cos(f1 t) + ia1 sin(f1 t) ∙ ¸ 0 if1 t ei30t (2.186 m¨ + cy + ky = F2 (t) y ˙ (2. which represents the forced vibration.01 0.

35 and 36 respectively. 7855 × 10−4 sin 35t = −1.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 118 where c 2 y10 = (−f1 m+if1 c + k)−1 F10 = ¸¶−1 ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ µ 16000 −10000 0 0 10 0 0 2 + + 30i = = −30 −10000 22000 0 100 0 20 30 ∙ ¸ −. 6 × 10−3 cos 30t + 7. 688 × 10−3 cos 30t + 7. 15 × 10−3 cos 35t + 3. 4196 × 10−4 i ¸ i35t ¶ (2.00 384 cos 30t + . 41 × 10−4 sin 35t ∙ (2. 7855 × 10−4 i −1. 1546 × 10−3 − 3. 7855 × 10−4 sin 35t + −1. 78 × 10−4 sin 35t −2.00 38 cos 30t + .192) .00 384 cos 30t + . 84 × 10−4 i The motion of the system.191) = −1. 1546 × 10−3 cos 35t + 3.00 112i = (2.00 112i i30t y1 = Re e −2. as the real part of 2.00 11 sin 30t − 3. 84 × 10−4 i ∙ ¸ −. 183 × 10−3 cos 35t + 1.00 112 sin 30t + = −2. 84 × 10−4 sin 30t Similarly. 688 × 10−3 cos 30t + 7.193. 1546 × 10−3 cos 35t + 3.00 112 sin 30t = −2. 688 × 10−3 − 7. 1 × 10−3 cos 35t + 1. one can obtained motion due to the excitation F2 (t) c 2 y20 = (−f2 m+if2 c + k)−1 F20 = ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸¶−1 ∙ ¸ µ 10 0 0 0 16000 −10000 0 2 + 35i + = = −35 0 20 0 100 −10000 22000 35 ¸ ∙ −3.00 384 − . 8 × 10−4 sin 30t − 1.190) −2. 4196 × 10−4 sin 35t = ¸ ∙ −. computed according to the equation 2. 84 × 10−4 sin 30t ∙ ¸ −3. 4196 × 10−4 i Hence y2 = Re e ¸ ∙ −3. 4196 × 10−4 sin 35t The resultant motion of the system due to both components of excitation is y = y1 + y2 ¸ −. µ∙ −3. 183 × 10−3 cos 35t + 1. 7855 × 10−4 i (2.193) This resultant motion of the system along the coordinates y1 and y2 .189 is ¶ µ∙ ¸ −. 183 × 10−3 − 1. 1546 × 10−3 − 3.00 384 − . 688 × 10−3 − 7. 183 × 10−3 − 1. is shown in Fig.

005 0 -0.5 t[s] -0.01 Figure 35 y2[m] 0.5 1 1.005 0.005 0 -0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 119 y1[m] 0.5 1 1.5 t[s] -0.005 0.01 Figure 36 .

38 . 6 · 10−3 cos 30t + 7. The exciting force at the point A required to maintain the steady state motion y2 c y A y Figure 37 To develop the expression for the force necessary to move the point A according to the assumed motion 2. let us consider the damper c shown in Fig. 4 · 10−4 sin 35t)) = = 27.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 120 4.196) Diagram of this force is presented in Fig. If the point A moves with the velocity y and in the same time the mass m2 moves with the ˙ velocity y2 . 1405 sin 35t[N] (2. it is necessary to apply at the point A the following force ˙ ˙ (2.195) FA = c (y − y2 ) Hence. the relative velocity of the point A with respect to the mass m2 is ˙ v = y − y2 ˙ ˙ (2.194) .183 and 2. 37. 8 · 10−4 sin 30t+ −1. 648 cos 30t + 34.01 · sin 35t) + d − dt (−2. .01 · sin 30t + 0. 1 · 10−3 cos 35t + 1. 503 cos 35t − 8. to realize this motion.193 we have d FA = 100( dt (0.183. according to the equation 2. m2 y2 Therefore. 064 sin 30t − 4.

00 38 cos 30t+. P l 1 J1 E 1 B MB RB y1 Figure 39 According to Fig.199) Hence ¡ ¢ RB =6000 −. 15 × 10−3 cos 35t + 3.2 · 1012 · 1 · 10−8 y1 = = 6000y1 3 l1 13 The motion along the coordinate y1 is determined by the function 2. 78×10−4 sin 35t (2.00 11 sin 30t−3. This relationship is determined by the formula 2.00 11 sin 30t−3.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 121 FA[N] 40 20 0 -20 -40 -60 0. 15×10−3 cos 35t+3.173 3E1 J1 3 · 0. 15×10−3 cos 35t + 3.197) where P is dependent on the instantaneous displacement y1 . 78 × 10−4 sin 35t (2.00 11 sin 30t − 3.198) y1 = −.193 P = k1 y1 = (2.5 1 1.5 t[s] Figure 38 5. 78×10−4 sin 35t ¡ ¢ MB =6000·1· −.00 38 cos 30t+.200) . 39 RB = P MB = P l1 (2.00 38 cos 30t + . The reaction force and the reaction moment at the point B.

the diﬀerential equation of motion in terms of the normal coordinates 4. the equation motion of the system along the coordinates x and ϕ due to the given initial conditions. ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ (2. All motion is in the vertical plane.1 m r = . can move along the horizontal slide and is supported by two springs 3 each of stiﬀness k. 41) have been formulated in page 81 to be m¨ + kx = 0 x where 2 I = m2 r2 5 (2. 40. in terms of the coordinates x and ϕ (see Fig. k= 2k 0 0 m2 gR . the link 1 was placed to the position shown in Fig.01 m Produce: 1. shown in Fig. For the following data: m1 = 2 kg m2 = 1 kg R = 0. m= m1 + m2 m2 R m2 R m2 R2 + I . The ball 2 of mass m2 and a radius r is hinged to the link 1 at the point A by means of the massless and rigid rod 4. The equation of motion. the normalized natural modes 3. x= x ϕ . 42 and released with the initial velocity equal to zero.05 m k = 1000 N/m a = 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 122 Problem 30 The link 1 of a mass m1 . the natural frequencies of the system 2.202) At the instant t = 0.201) .

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 123 1 A k 3 4 2 r k R Figure 40 y 1 x k o k x 3 2 r R ϕ G Figure 41 y 1 a k o k x 3 2 r R Figure 42 .

0 0 1000 0 = k = 0 1.208) 1 Φ1 = − 3.092 + 1000. ¯∙ ¸¯ ¯ ¯ −3.0 ¯ Its roots: yield the wanted natural frequencies £ 22.1 (2.0 · 22.0 Φ 0 This set of equations has non-zero solution if and only if its determinant is equal to zero.001 ¸ ¸ ∙ ∙ 1000.0X1 − .1 According to 2.0 = −10.0 −.0ω2 + 1000. 1ω2 n n ¯ = .204) where ω stands for the natural frequency and X is the corresponding natural mode. 0913 the equations 2.1 1 · 0. 1ω 2 X 0 n n = (2. Therefore.207) For ω n = ω1 = 9.991 2 .99 2 . 1 · 9.205 become linearly dependent. the inertia matrix and the stuﬃness matrix are 2 · 1 · 0. 1ω n −. X2 = 1 Φ2 = ¡ ¢ 1 −3.Similar consideration. 1 · 22.12 + 0.0913 These two numbers form the ﬁrst mode of vibrations corresponding to the ﬁrst natural frequency ω 1 .0 .9362 + 1000. X1 = 1) and the other may be produced from the ﬁrst equation of the set 2. 936 −22.0 · 9. 936 [s−1 ] ¤ (2.936 X1 = 1 −3.0 11 1 · 0.0 = 0 (2. 936 9.yields the second mode.001 kgm2 I = 5 ¸ ¸ ∙ ∙ 3.0X1 ω2 + 1000. Hence for the given numerical data we are getting ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ −3. (2. carried out for the natural frequency ω2 = 22.g.203) = m = .0 11ω n + 1.108 (page 102) one can write the following set of equations (−ω 2 m + k)X = 0 n (2. 091 3 ω1 = 9. 936.0) = 90. The natural frequencies and the natural modes According to the given numerical data the moment of inertia of the ball.0ω2 + 1000.0ω 2 + 1000. 091 3 −9.205) 2 2 −. 1 . Hence the equation for the natural frequencies is. 1 2 + 1 1 · 0.0 0 1 · 10 · 0.0 −. 1ω2 Φ1 = 0 1 1 (2.0 11ωn + 1.0 23ω4 − 14.209) .052 = 0.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 124 Solution 1.205. 1ωn −.206) ¯ 2 2 n n ¯ −. one of the unknown can be chosen arbitrarily (e. 0913 ω2 = 22.

4375 × 10−2 Ξ1 = = (2.99 Similar procedure allows the second normalized mode to be obtained ∙ ¸∙ ¸ £ ¤ 3. 1 9.991 .210) In this case the modal matrix has two eigenvectors X1 and X2 . 99 = 112.991 √ λ2 = 2. 1 .0 11 . 1 1 2 = 2. 5872 10. 4375 × 10−2 . 596 90.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 125 Now.0 .213) Division of the eigenvector X1 by the factor λ1 yields the normalized mode Ξ1 . 4597 −10. ΞT mΞ = ∙ ¸∙ ¸∙ ¸ 9.99 √ λ1 = 112. 1 1 1 90.991 ¸ (2. 5296 1. 4597 ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 1 1 .0 . one can create the modal matrix X = [X1 . ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 1 1 9.0 11 −10. 5296 ¸ ∙ 1 0 (2. 4375 × 10−2 .212) (2. 5296 8.991 (2.211) (2. ¸ ∙ 9. 27 .121 the normalization factor is XT mXn = λ2 n n Hence λ2 1 = £ ¸∙ ¸ 3. 68507 3. 68507 Ξ2 = = −7.214) 8. Indeed. 68507 Ξ= 8.217) = 0 1 . 5872 −7. 1 . 596 ¤ ∙ (2.99 −10. Normalization of the natural modes According to 2. 1 . 5872 −7.99 −10. 27 = 10. 1306 λ2 = 1 −10.991 2.216) The normalized eigenvectors must be orthogonal with respect to both the inertia matrix and the stiﬀness matrix. 5872 = . 1306 = 1. ¸ ¸ ∙ ∙ 1 1 . X2 = X1 = 90. X2 ] = ∙ 1 1 90.215) These two vectors forms the normalized modal matrix Ξ.0 11 90. 68507 −7.0 . 4375 × 10−2 8. 5296 (2.

222) 0 1 0 (22. 5872 = 0 1 · 10 · 0.36 is v01 sin ω 1 t + η 01 cos ω 1 t η1 = ω1 v02 η2 = sin ω 2 t + η 02 cos ω 2 t (2. (ΞT mΞ)¨ +(ΞT kΞ)η = 0 η (2. 4375 × 10−2 .220) into 2.225) 1.4313 × 10−2 0 0 η 02 Φo ∙ ¸ . 68507 1000 0 9.3024 × 10−2 . 647 0 (9. 091)2 ω1 0 0 = = = (2.1 . 68507 −7. These initial conditions must be formulated along the normal coordinates. according to 1. 091)2 η 1 = 0 ¨ η 2 + (22. ¸ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ∙ 1.223) The general solution of the above set of the diﬀerential equations. 02 0 ω2 0 (22.221) Taking advantage of the orthogonality conditions.224) ω2 Where η 01 and η 02 stand for the initial position whereas v01 and v02 stand for the initial velocity of the system along the normal coordinates. 5296 ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ 2 ¸ 82.1039 Xo a 0. 935)2 or η 1 + (9.3024 −1.01 η 01 −1 −1 = = Ξ =Ξ 1.131 x = Ξη that in the case considered has the following form ¸ ∙ ∙ ¸ η1 X = Ξη = Ξ Φ η2 (2. the equations of motion are of the following form ¸ ∙ ∙ ¸ 1 0 (9. 091)2 0 η+ ¨ η=0 (2.142 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 126 and ΞT kΞ = ∙ ¸∙ ¸∙ ¸ 9.218) 2 0 526. 935)2 η 2 = 0 ¨ (2. 935) 2 3. 5872 −7. The diﬀerential equation of motion in terms of the normal coordinates Introducing the substitution 2.201 and premultiplying them from the left hand side by ΞT we are getting the diﬀerential equations of motion in terms of the normal coordinates η.219) (2. 5296 8. It can be obtained by transforming the initial conditions from the physical coordinates to the normal coordinates.01142 = (2. 4375 × 10−2 8.

Hence.228) = 9. 43 and 44 0. using the relationship 2. 4375 × 10−2 . 8066 × 10−2 cos 22. we are getting ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ 9.01142 cos 9.15 Φ [rad] 0. 9224 × 10−3 cos 22. 091t − 9. The equations of motion of the system along the coordinates x and ϕ To produce equation of motion along the physical coordinates. 5872 −7.005 -0. 935t This motion is presented in Fig.2 0.5 1 1.15 0. 091t + 8.224 results in motion of the system along the normal coordinates η 1 = η 01 cos ω 1 t = .5 t[s] -0.3024 × 10−2 cos 22.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 127 Introduction of the above initial conditions into the equations 2.5 t[s] Figure 44 .227) 4.935t Φ 8. 935t (2.935t ∙ v01 v02 ¸ = ∙ 0 0 ¸ (2.01142 cos 9.1 0.005 0 0.091t η 2 = η 02 cos ω 2 t = 1. 8066 × 10−2 cos 9.1 -0.3024 × 10−2 cos 22.05 -0.05 0 -0.219. 0778 × 10−3 cos 9. 68507 . 5296 ¸ ∙ 1.091t X = Ξη = = 1.01 X[m] 0. one has to transform the motion along the normal coordinates beck to the physical ones.5 1 1.01 Figure 43 0.226) (2.

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 128 Problem 31 L A 1 F=F cosω t o B M. Derive an expression for the ﬁxing moment and the ﬁxing force at the point D due to the exciting force F that is applied to the system at the point B. 45. . Its end D is ﬁxed and the particle 3 of mass m is attached to the end C. The beam 2 is massless and the Young’s modulus E and the second moment of area J determine its dynamic properties.J D 3 l Figure 45 2 The rigid beam 1 of mass M. length L and the moment of inertia about its point of rotation IA . is supported by means of the spring of stiﬀness k and the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c as shown in Fig. I A k C c E.

The centres of gravity of these rods are denoted by G1 and G2 respectively. Φ2 . and m2 . Answer: RA = Φ2 ak2 .particular solutionof equation M¨ + Cx + Kx = x ˙ cos ω 2 t −F2 b 3. k2 and as well as the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c. Produce 1. k1 . K= . These rods are connected to each other by means of springs of the stiﬀness k. 1 and 2. Vibrations of the system are excited by the two harmonic forces of amplitudes F1 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 129 Problem 32 1 O1 s1 k1 c s2 k2 A m1 I O1 G1 G2 b m 2 I O2 O2 a 2 F cosω 1 t 1 k F cosω 2 t 2 Figure 46 The two rods. C= .the lower element of the matrix X . IO1 . are suspended in the vertical plane as shown in Fig. M= 2 2 ca∙ −kb2 k2 a2 + kb2 + m2 gs2 ¸−ca ¸ ∙ 0 ¸ Io2 ∙ ϕ1 F1 b 0 cos ω 1 t + cos ω2 t x= . the diﬀerential equation of the small vibrations of the system in the matrix form Answer: M¨ + Cx + Kx¸= F ∙ x ∙ ˙ ¸ ∙ ¸ −kb2 ca2 −ca2 k1 a2 + kb2 + m1 gs1 Io1 0 . 46. the expression for the forced vibrations of the rods Answer: X = X1 + X2 ¸ ∙ F1 b cos ω 1 t X1 . F2 and frequencies ω1 and ω2 . Their mass and their moment of inertia about their points of rotation are respectively m1 .particular solutionof equation M¨ + Cx + Kx = x ˙ ∙ 0 ¸ 0 X2 . IO2 . F= −F2 b 0 ϕ2 2. the expression for the dynamic reaction at the point A.

It can be approximated by a particle of the mass M that is concentrated at the point G that is located by the dimensions h and a. Answer: M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ∙ ˙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ IA + M(h2 + a2 ) 0 c1 b2 + c2 a2 −c2 a k1 b 0 M= .IA c1 C A B c2 2 m2 k1 1 ω h µ k2 D Figure 47 The rigid beam 1 (see Fig. 47) is hinged at the point A and is supported at the point C by means of the spring of stiﬀness k1 and the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c1 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 130 Problem 33 b 3 a m M G m1. Produce 1. Its mass and its moment of inertia about A are m1 and IA respectively. C= . F= cos ωt x= x 0 . To attenuate the vibrations of the beam the block 2 of mass m2 was attached. The damping coeﬃcient of the damper between the beam and the block is denoted by c2 and the stiﬀness of the supporting spring in denoted by k2 . the diﬀerential equation of motion of the system and present it in the standard matrix form. The motor 3 is mounted on this beam. The rotor of this motor rotates with the constant velocity ω. Its mass is equal to m and its unbalance is µ. K= . 0 m2 −c2 a 0 k2 c2 ∙ √ ¸ ∙ ¸ α mµω 2 h2 + a2 .

x .the linear displacement of the block 2 2.the angular displacement of the beam1. Produce the expression for the interaction forces at the point A and D.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 131 α . .

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM

132

Problem 34

l A G k

l

F C

l D

α

B

β

k

Figure 48 Three uniform platforms each of the length l, the mass m and the moment of inertia about axis through its centre of gravity IG are hinged together to form a bridge that is shown in Fig. 48. This bridge is supported by means of two springs each of the stiﬀness k. This system has two degree of freedom and the two generalized coordinates are denoted by α and β. There is an excitation force F applied at the hinge C. This force can be adopted in the following form F = Fo cos ωt Produce: 1. the diﬀerential equations of motion of the system and present them in the standard form Answer: M¨ + Kx = F ¸ x ∙ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 2 1 0 α 0 −1 2 2 3 6 ml ; K = kl ; x = ; F= M= cos ωt 2 0 1 β Fo l −1 3 6 2. the equation for the natural frequencies of the system Answer: |K − 1ω n | = 0 3. the expression for the amplitude of the forced vibrations of the system Answer: ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 0 A −1 2 X = [−ω M + K] cos ωt = Fo l B 4. the expression for the interaction force between the spring attached to the hinge B and the ground Answer: R = Akl cos ωt

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM

133

Problem 35

1

L

m1,IA x k m k1 B c

ϕ

2

A

y

Figure 49 Figure. 49 shows the physical model of a trolley. It was modelled as a system with two degree of freedom. Its position is determined by two generalized coordinates x and ϕ. The moment of inertia of he trolley about the point A is denoted by IA and its mass by m1 . The dynamic properties of the shock-absorber are approximated by the spring of stiﬀness k and damper of the damping coeﬃcient c. Mass of the wheels 2 are denoted by m and the stiﬀness of its tire is k1 . Motion of the trolley is excited by roughnees of the road. It causes motion of the point B according to the following function. y = A sin ωt Produce: 1. the diﬀerential equation of motion of the system 2. the equation for the natural frequencies of the system 3. the expression for the amplitudes of the steady state vibration of the system 4. the expression for the amplitude of the interaction force between the tire and suface of the road..

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM

134

Problem 36

y A c3 m3 k3 3

2 4

r m2,I2

k2 k1 m1

1

c1 B

Figure 50 In Fig. 50 the physical model of a winch is shown. The blocks 1 and 3 are rigid and their masses are respectively m1 and m3 respectively. The rigid pulley 2 has radius r, mass m2 and the moment of inertia about its axis of rotation I2 . The elastic properties of the rope 4 are modeled by two springs of stiﬀness k1 and k2 . The point A moves with respect to the axis y according to the following equation. y = a cos ωt Produce: 1. the diﬀerential equation of motion of the system and present it in the following matrix form. M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM

135

⎤ ⎤ ⎡ Answer: ⎡ 0 0 m1 c1 0 0 M = ⎣ 0 m2 + m3 0 ⎦ ; C = ⎣ 0 c3 0 ⎦ 0 I2 0⎤ 0 0 ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 0 ⎡ −k1 −k1 r k1 x1 0 K = ⎣ −k1 k1 + k2 + k3 k1 r − k2 r ⎦ F = ⎣ ak3 ⎦ cos ωt; x = ⎣ x2 ⎦ −k1 r k1 r − k2 r (k1 + k2 ) r2 0 ϕ x1 - the linear displacement of the block 1 x2 - the linear displacement of the pulley 2 and the block 3 ϕ - the angular displacement of the pulley 2 2. the expression for the amplitudes of the forced vibrations of the system Answer: The particular solution xp of the equation M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ The ﬁrst element xp1 of the matrix xp represents displacement of the block 1 3. the expression for the interaction force at point B. Answer RB = c1 xp1 ˙

the expression for the amplitudes of the forced vibrations of the system 3. the expression for the toque transmitted through the shaft k1. and I3 are connected to each other by means of the massless shafts that the torsional stiﬀness are k1 . I2 . M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ 2. the diﬀerential equation of motion of the system and present it in the following matrix form. k2 and k3 respectively.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 136 Problem 37 I1 I2 I3 D2 D1 T3 k1 k2 Figure 51 k3 Figure 51 shows the physical model of a compressor. It can be approximated by the following function T3 = T cos ωt Produce: 1. . The shaft k1 is connected to the shaft k2 by means of the gear of ratio i = D1 /D2 . There is a torque T3 applied to the disk I3 . The disks of moment of inertia I1 .

In the above equations not all variables are independent.232) . ϕ22 = iϕ11 Hence the equations can be rewritten as follows I1 ϕ1 = −k1 ϕ1 + k1 ϕ11 ¨ (2.230) D1 2 D2 0 = −k2 iϕ11 + k2 ϕ2 − F21 2 I2 ϕ2 = −(k2 + k3 )ϕ2 + k2 iϕ11 + k3 ϕ3 ¨ I3 ϕ3 = −k3 ϕ3 + k3 ϕ2 + T3 ¨ 0 = −k1 ϕ11 + k1 ϕ1 + F12 (2.229) (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 137 Solution ϕ2 ϕ3 ϕ22 F21 F12 T3 I1 ϕ2 ϕ22 I2 ϕ3 I3 D2 T3 D1 ϕ11 ϕ1 ϕ1 ϕ11 k1 k2 k3 Figure 52 To produce the equations of motion of the system one may split it into ﬁve rigid bodies (Newton approach) and write the following set of equations I1 ϕ1 = −k1 ϕ1 + k1 ϕ11 ¨ D1 2 D2 0 = −k2 ϕ22 + k2 ϕ2 − F21 2 I2 ϕ2 = −(k2 + k3 )ϕ2 + k2 ϕ22 + k3 ϕ3 ¨ I3 ϕ3 = −k3 ϕ3 + k3 ϕ2 + T3 ¨ 0 = −k1 ϕ11 + k1 ϕ1 + F12 where F12 F21 stand for the interaction forces between the rear D1 and D2 .231) According to the third Newton’s law we have F12 = F21 (2.

238) M =⎣ I2 The same results one can get by means of the Lagrange’s equations ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ −ke 0 ke iϕ1 ⎦ . second and ﬁfth equation of the set 2. C = 0.233 allows the angular displacement ϕ11 to be expressed in terms of the displacements ϕ1 and ϕ2 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 138 Hence the second and third equation yields F12 = 2 2 (k1 ϕ11 − k1 ϕ1 ) = (−k2 iϕ11 + k2 ϕ2 ) = F21 D1 D2 k1 ϕ11 − k1 ϕ1 = (2.236) k1 k2 k1 + i2 k2 The above set of equations can be now presented in the matrix form M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ where ⎡ 1 I i2 1 where (2. K = ⎣ −ke ke + k3 −k3 ⎦ .237) (2.235) (2.239) T cos ωt ⎡ ⎤ . ϕ11 = k1 ik2 ϕ + ϕ 2 1 k1 + k2 i k1 + k2 i2 2 (2.234) Introduction of this relationship into the ﬁrst. x = ⎣ ϕ2 ⎦ I3 0 −k3 k3 ϕ3 ⎡ ⎤ 0 ⎦ 0 F =⎣ (2.231 one can get ¨ I1 ϕ1 = −k1 ϕ1 + I2 ϕ2 ¨ ¨ I3 ϕ3 or µ ¶ 1 ϕ I1 (i¨ 1 ) = −ke (iϕ1 ) + ke ϕ2 i2 I2 ϕ2 = −ke ϕ2 − k3 ϕ2 + ke (iϕ1 ) + k3 ϕ3 ¨ ¨ I3 ϕ3 = −k3 ϕ3 + k3 ϕ2 + T3 ke = 2 k1 ik1 k2 ϕ1 + ϕ k1 + k2 i2 k1 + k2 i2 2 2 k1 k2 i i2 k2 = −(k2 + k3 )ϕ2 + ϕ1 + ϕ + k3 ϕ3 k1 + k2 i2 k1 + k2 i2 2 = −k3 ϕ3 + k3 ϕ2 + T3 (2.233) D1 (−k2 iϕ11 + k2 ϕ2 ) D2 The equation 2.

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 139 The kinetic energy function and the potential energy function of the system considered are 1 1 1 T = I1 ϕ2 + I2 ϕ2 + I3 ϕ2 ˙1 ˙2 ˙3 2 2 2 V 1 k1 (ϕ11 − ϕ1 )2 + 2 1 = k1 (ϕ11 − ϕ1 )2 + 2 = d ∂T dt ∂ ϕ1 ˙ d ∂T dt ∂ ϕ2 ˙ d ∂T dt ∂ ϕ3 ˙ ∂T ∂ϕ1 1 1 k2 (ϕ2 − ϕ22 )2 + k3 (ϕ3 − ϕ2 )2 = 2 2 1 1 k2 (ϕ2 − iϕ11 )2 + k3 (ϕ3 − ϕ2 )2 2 2 Hence = I1 ϕ1 ¨ = I2 ϕ2 ¨ = I3 ϕ3 ¨ = 0.240) . ∂T = 0. ∂ϕ2 ∂T =0 ∂ϕ3 ¶ µ ¶ µ ∂V 1 ∂ϕ11 1 ∂ϕ11 = = − 1 + k2 2(ϕ2 − iϕ11 ) −i k1 2(ϕ11 − ϕ1 ) ∂ϕ1 2 ∂ϕ1 2 ∂ϕ1 = i2 ke ϕ1 − ike ϕ2 ¶ ¶ µ µ 1 1 1 ∂ϕ11 ∂V ∂ϕ11 + k2 2(ϕ2 − iϕ11 ) 1 − i + k3 2(ϕ3 − ϕ2 ) (−1) = k1 2(ϕ11 − ϕ1 ) = ∂ϕ2 2 ∂ϕ2 2 ∂ϕ2 2 = −ke iϕ1 + (ke + k3 )ϕ2 − ke ϕ3 ∂V 1 = k3 2(ϕ3 − ϕ2 ) (1) = ∂ϕ3 2 = −k3 ϕ2 + k3 ϕ3 The virtual work produced by the impressed forces acting on the system is δW = (0) ϕ1 + (0) ϕ2 + (T3 ) ϕ3 Introduction of the above expressions into the following Lagrange’s equations ∂T ∂V d ∂T − + = Q1 dt ∂ ϕ1 ∂ϕ1 ∂ϕ1 ˙ d ∂T ∂T ∂V − + = Q2 dt ∂ ϕ2 ∂ϕ2 ∂ϕ2 ˙ d ∂T ∂T ∂V − + = Q3 dt ∂ ϕ3 ∂ϕ3 ∂ϕ3 ˙ (2.

239. I1r = 1 1 1 1 1 = + = k1 + ke k1r k2 k2 i2 It is ke = k1 k2 k1 + i2 k2 (2. The equivalent stiﬀness of the shaft assembled of the shaft k2 and k1r can be produced from the following equation ϕ1r = iϕ1 .243) (2.244) . 53 ϕ1r= iϕ1 I1r=I1 / i2 k1r=k1 / i D2 2 ϕ2 I2 ϕ3 I3 T3 D1 I1 ϕ1 k1 k2 k3 Figure 53 In this ﬁgure I1 k1 . reduced moment of inertia and reduced stiﬀness. k1r = 2 (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 140 yields the wanted equations of motion of the system considered ¨ I1 ϕ1 + ke ϕ1 − ike ϕ2 = 0 ¨ I2 ϕ2 + −ke iϕ1 + (ke + k3 )ϕ2 − ke ϕ3 = 0 ¨ I3 ϕ3 + −k3 ϕ2 + k3 ϕ3 = T3 or ¶ I1 (¨ 1 i) + ke (ϕ1 i) − ke ϕ2 = 0 ϕ i2 I2 ϕ2 − ke (ϕ1 i) + (ke + k3 )ϕ2 − ke ϕ3 = 0 ¨ ¨ I3 ϕ3 + −k3 ϕ2 + k3 ϕ3 = T3 µ (2. It is easy to see that precisely the same equations possesses the system presented in Fig.242) 2 i i stands for so called reduced displacement.241) They are identical with the equation 2.

the equations of motion of the system presented in Fig. 53 are as follows µ ¶ I1 (¨ 1 i) + ke (ϕ1 i) − ke ϕ2 = 0 ϕ i2 I2 ϕ2 − ke (ϕ1 i) + (ke + k3 )ϕ2 − ke ϕ3 = 0 ¨ (2.245) ¨ I3 ϕ3 + −k3 ϕ2 + k3 ϕ3 = T3 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 141 Hence.

Vibrations of the pendulum about the horizontal axis Z are excited by the harmonic moment M applied to the body 1. The system has two degrees of freedom and the generalized coordinates are denoted by q1 and q2 . G2) are I1 and I2 respectively. These bodies possess masses m1 and m2 and the moments of inertia about the axis through their centers of gravity (G1. Produce: 1. the diﬀerential equation of small oscillations of the pendulum and present it in the following matrix form M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 142 Problem 38 M=Mocosωt O c1 l q1 G1 1 Y A a b c2 c k c q1 q2 k 2 B G2 X Figure 54 Two rigid bodies 1 and 2 were hinged together at the point A to form the double pendulum whose physical model is shown in Fig.??.

M= . C= . ¸ ¸ ∙ Answer: ∙ IG1 + m1 c2 + IG2 + m2 (l + c2 )2 IG2 + m2 c2 (l + c2 ) q1 1 .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 143 Take advantage of Lagrange’s equations. . x= IG2 + m2 c2 (l + c2 ) IG2 m2 c2 ¸ ∙ q2 ¸ ∙ ¸ 2 ∙ m1 gc1 + m2 g(l + c2 ) 0 0 Mo m2 gc2 K= . the expression for the amplitudes of the forced vibrations of the pendulum 3. the expression for the interaction force between the damper and the body 1 at the point B. F= 0 2ca2 m2 gc2 m2 gc2 + 2kb2 0 2.

Its moment of inertia about the axis X-X is I X . This assembly is free to rotate about the horizontal axis X-X and is kept in the horizontal position by means of two springs each of stiﬀness k v and two dampers each of the damping coeﬃcient c v . This rotor is unbalanced and its centre of gravity is oﬀ from its axis of rotation by µ. The rotor R of the ventilator V possesses a mass m R and rotates with a constant angular velocity Ω. This assembly is furnished with the dynamic absorber of vibrations. Produce: 1.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 144 Problem 39 B X Gr V X R Ω α kv cv kd kv cd l cv e a b d D x Figure 55 The assembly of the ventilator V and its base B (see Fig. It is made of the block D of mass m d . The block D can translate along the inertial axis x only. the spring of stiﬀness k d and the damper of the damping coeﬃcient c d . The diﬀerential equation of small oscillations of the system shown in Fig. 55) can be considered as a rigid body. The angular displacement α deﬁnes the instantaneous position of this assembly.1 and present it in the following matrix form M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ . Its centre of gravity G r is located by the distances a and b.

F= cos Ωt x= x 0 2. K= . The expression for the amplitudes of the forced vibrations of the system along the coordinates x and α 3. Ix 0 . ∙ .ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 145 ¸ ∙ Answer. M= 0 m ¸ ∙ ¸ 2cv e2 + cd l2 −cd l 2kv d2 + kd l2 −kd l C= . −c l −kd l c kd ∙ d √ ¸ ∙ ¸ d α mR µΩ2 a2 + b2 . The expression for the force transmitted to foundation by the damper c v .

The support 5 moves along the horizontal axis Y according to the following function Y = a cos ωt The lower end of the rod is connected to the blocks 2 and 3 by means of two springs 4 each of stiﬀness k. The blocks mass is m2 and m3 respectively. . M¨ + Cx + Kx = F x ˙ 2. 56 is hinged at the point A to the support 5. 3. It possesses three degrees of freedom and the three independent coordinates are denoted by y2 and y3 . The expression for the driving force that must be applied to the point A in order to assure the assumed motion Y (t). The expression for the amplitudes of the forced vibrations of the system.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 146 Problem 40 Y 5 A Y 1 l 3 y3 y2 G1 2 α B 4 X Figure 56 The uniform rod 1 of mass m and length l shown in Fig. The system performs small oscillation in the vertical plane XY . The diﬀerential equation of small oscillations of the and present it in the following matrix form. Produce: 1.

rG1 = J(Y + l l sin α) + I( cos α) 2 2 (2.246) To produce the kinetic energy function T associated with the the rod 1.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 147 Solution Y 5 A rG1 1 l 3 y3 y2 G1 Y 2 α B 4 X Figure 57 Motion of the system is governed by the Lagrange equations.248) (2.247) Its ﬁrst derivative provide us with the absolute velocity of the centre of gravity. d ∂T ∂T ∂V − + = 0 dt ∂ α ∂α ˙ ∂α ∂T ∂V d ∂T − + = 0 dt ∂ y2 ∂y2 ∂y2 ˙ ∂T ∂V d ∂T − + = 0 dt ∂ y3 ∂y3 ∂y3 ˙ (2. l l ˙ ˙ ˙ rG1 = J(Y + α cos α) + I(− α sin α) ˙ 2 2 Hence. let us develop the position vector of its centre of gravity G1 . the kinetic energy of the rod is ¶ µ 1 1 l l 2 2 ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ T1 = m (Y + α cos α) + (− α sin α) + IG1 α2 2 2 2 2 (2.249) .

ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 148 Since the kinetic energy of the blocks 2 and 3 is as follows 1 T2 = m2 y2 ˙2 2 1 T3 = m3 y3 ˙2 2 (2.253) (2. x = ⎣ y2 ⎦ ⎦=⎣ ⎣ k2 a (2. 58 (2. The free body diagrams are shown in Fig.251 and 2.255) (2.254) 2 2 2 Introducing the expressions 2.254 into equations 2.246 one can get the required equation in the following matrix form.252) . K = ⎣ −k2 l k2 0 ⎦ M = ⎣ 0 k3 0 0 m3 −k3 l ⎤ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 1 ⎡ 1 ⎡ ¨ α + 2 mlaω2 − a (k2 l + k3 l) − 2 mY − (k2 l + k3 l) Y ⎦ .251) ˙ ˙ ˙2 ˙2 2 2 8 2 2 2 The potential energy of the springs 4 is 1 1 Vs = k2 (y2 − Y − l sin α)2 + k3 (−y3 + Y + l sin α)2 2 2 The potential energy due to gravitation is l Vg = −mgrG1Y = −mg cos α 2 Hence.256) F = k2 Y k3 a y3 k3 Y ⎡ To verify the above equations of motion let us employ the Newton-Euler method for modeling of the system considered. C = 0. the total potential energy is 1 1 l V = Vs + Vg = k2 (y2 − Y − l sin α)2 + k3 (−y3 + Y + l sin α)2 − mg cos α (2.250) the total kinetic energy of the whole system is 1 ˙ 1 1 1 1 1 ˙ ˙ T = T1 +T2 +T3 = mY 2 + mlY α cos α+ ml2 α2 + IG1 α2 + m2 y2 + m3 y3 (2. M¨ + Cx + Kx = F cos ωt x ˙ where ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 1 0 mgl + k2 l2 + k3 l2 −k2 l −k3 l IG + 1 ml2 0 4 2 0 m2 0 ⎦ .

260) (2.247.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 149 Y RAX 5 A RAY Y 1 l 3 G1 y3 y2 G1 2 α B R3Y 4 R3Y R2Y R2Y X Figure 58 For the rod one can produce the following two equations 1 ¨ IG α = − RAY l + 2 maG1Y = RAY + R2Y 1 1 R2Y l + R3Y l 2 2 + R3Y (2. l l l l ¨ ¨G1 = J(Y + α cos α − α2 sin α) + I(− α sin α − α2 cos α) r ¨ ˙ ¨ ˙ 2 2 2 2 Hence After linearization l l ¨ ¨ ˙ aG1Y = Y + α cos α − α2 sin α 2 2 l ¨ aG1Y = Y + α ¨ 2 (2.261) (2. It can be obtained by diﬀerentiation of the absolute velocity vector 2.262) .258) RAY = maG1Y − R2Y − R3Y Introduction of the above expression into the ﬁrst equation of 2.259) In the latest equation aG1Y stands for the component Y of the absolute acceleration of the centre of gravity G1 . (2.257) The second equation can be used for determination of the unknown interaction force RAY .257 gives 1 ¨ IG α = − lmaG1Y + R2Y l + R3Y l 2 (2.

the governing equations are 1 1 ¨ (IG + ml2 )¨ + k2 l2 α + k3 l2 α − k2 ly2 − k3 ly3 = − lmY − k2 lY − k3 lY α 4 2 m2 y2 + k2 y2 − k2 lα = k2 Y ¨ (2.264) Introducing them into equation 2.263) The interaction forces between the rod and the springs are can be expressed as follows R2Y = k2 (y2 − Y − αl).255. R3Y = k3 (y3 − Y − αl) (2. It can be predicted as x = A cos ωt Introducing it into the equation of motion we have (−ω 2 M + K)A = F The wanted vector of the amplitudes of the system forced vibrations is ⎤ ⎡ Aα A =(−ω2 M + K)−1 F = ⎣ Ay2 ⎦ Ay3 (2.264 we have ¨ m2 y2 + k2 y2 − k2 lα = k2 Y ¨ m3 y3 + k3 y3 + k3 lα = k3 Y Hence.262 into 2.259 results in the following equation l 1 ¨ IG α = − lm(Y + α) + R2Y l + R3Y l ¨ ¨ 2 2 (2.268) ¨ m3 y3 + k3 y3 + k3 lα = k3 Y They are identical with 2.269) (2.270) (2.271) (2.267) The amplitudes of the forced vibration could be obtained from the particular solution of the above equation.263 one can obtain 1 1 ¨ (IG + ml2 )¨ + k2 l2 α + k3 l2 α − k2 ly2 − k3 ly3 = − lmY − k2 lY − k3 lY α 4 2 The Newton’s law if apply to the blocks 2 and 3 yields m2 y2 = −R2Y ¨ m3 y3 = −R3Y ¨ Since the interaction forces are deﬁned by 2.266) (2.ANALYSIS OF MULTI-DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEM 150 Introduction of 2.265) (2. M¨ + Kx = F cos ωt x (2.272) .

Its follows that due to rotation of this body at each cross-section i there exists the centrifugal force Ui (see Fig. 59). They are distributed along.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 151 Now. the centres of gravity of the individual cross-sections do not have to coincide with this axis of rotation.258 = maG1Y − R2Y − R3Y ¶ µ l ¨ ¨ = m Y + α − k2 (y2 − Y − αl) − k3 (y3 − Y − αl) 2 µ ¶ l 2 2 = m −aω − Aα ω cos ωt + (2. 1 U1 2 ω B A m1 U2 ϕ1 ωt F2 Ui1 m2 ϕ2 ωt B A Ui2 Ui x2 F1 x1 Figure 59 In a general case. Each of this forces can be replaced by two forces Ui1 and Ui2 acting in . RAY 2.3 ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 2.3. line B − B.1 Balancing of rotors Let us consider a rigid rotor that rotates with an angular velocity ω about the axis A − A (see Fig. 59). usually unknown. the interaction force RAY can be produced as an explicit function of time from 2. due to the limited accuracy of manufacturing.273) 2 −k (A − a − Aα l) cos ωt − k3 (Ay3 − a − Aα l) cos ωt ¶ ¶ µ 2 µ y2 l 2 = m −a − Aα ω − k2 (Ay2 − a − Aα l) − k3 (Ay3 − a − Aα l) cos ωt 2 = |RAY | cos ωt ¯ ¡ ¯ ¢ l where |RAY | = ¯m −a − 2 Aα ω2 − k2 (Ay2 − a − Aα l) − k3 (Ay3 − a − Aα l)¯ is the amplitude of the interaction force.

Hence. These two arbitrarily chosen planes.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 152 two arbitrarily chosen planes. the unbalance forces can be represented by forces U1 and U2 in two arbitrarily chosen plane. Each of them is perpendicular to the axis of rotation. are . 1 2 x1 5 3 3 x3 1 2 x2 x4 4 4 ωt x1 ϕ1 ωt ωt U 1o U1 x2 t U2o ωt ϕ2 U2 a4 a 4o β3 a 3o a3 x3 β3 β4 ωt x3 ωt Figure 60 Let us consider the rotating machine shown in Fig. if the rotor of this machine can be approximated by a rigid body.denoted in Fig. The process of searching for magnitude of the unbalance forces U1 and U2 and their phases ϕ1 and ϕ2 is called balancing. The balancing of a rotor can be performed with help of a specially design machines before it is installed or can be carried out after its installation ’in its own bearings’. 60 by nubers 1 and 2. therefore their resultants U1 and U2 are perpendicular to the axis of rotation too. According to the above discussion. one can eliminate this unbalance of the rotor by means of two weights of mass m1 and m2 attached at such a position that the centrifugal forces F1 and F2 balance the resultant forces U1 and U2 . 60. The second approach for balancing rotors is consider in this section.

β 2 ) to be measured. Let us arrange for these vibrations to be recorded in two arbitrarily chosen planes. marked in Fig.274) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) a4 U2 where a3 = a3o eiβ 3 . the balancing planes should be chosen as far apart as possible. Test (1) 3 1 2 4 µ (1) m (1) U o (1) U (1) ϕ (1) ωt x1 ϕ1 ωt U 1o U1 x2 U2o ωt ϕ2 U2 a (1) 4o a (1) 4 (1) β4 β3 (1) (1) a 3o a3 x3 (1) ωt ωt Figure 61 . The transducer 5.275) If the transfer functions Ri. ϕ2 ) and the phases of the recorded displacements (β 1 . Furthermore.j (iω) would be known. U1 = U1o eiϕ1 . The equation 2. For long rotors. These unbalance forces excite vibrations of this machine. this relation would allow the unknow magnitudes of the unbalance as well as their phases to be determined. In order to identify the transfer functions two additional tests are required. which is called key phasor. there are numerous practical considerations for proper selection. creates a timing reference mark on the rotor.96 oﬀers the relationship between the unknown unbalance forces U1 and U2 and the measured displacements a3 and a4 . ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ¸∙ a3 R31 (iω) R32 (iω) U1 = (2. Although the selection of the balancing planes is arbitrary. a4 = a4o eiβ 4 . These planes. This mark.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 153 called balancing plane. for example. U2 = U2o eiϕ2 (2. are called measurement planes. 60 by N. shown in Fig. Let a3 and a4 be the complex displacements measured in the measurement plasen along the coordinates x3 and x4 with help of the two transducers 3 and 4. 60 by numbers 3 and 4. these plane should oﬀer an easy access and allow additional weights to be attached. allows the phases of the unbalance forces (ϕ1 .

There is the following . The system is now excited by both the residual unbalance forces (U1 and U2 ) and the centrifugal force produced by the trial weight U (1) . # ∙ " ¸∙ ¸ (1) R31 (iω) R32 (iω) a3 U1 + U (1) = (2. The amplitude of this force U (2) is (2) Uo = m(2) µ(2) ω2 (2.276) The response of the system is recorded in both measurment planes so the amplitudes (1) (1) (1) (1) a3o and a4o as well as the phases β 3 and β 4 can be obtained. (1) U (1) = Uo eiϕ (2. The system is now excited by both the residual unbalance forces (U1 and U2 ) and the centrifugal force produced by the trial weight U (2) .279) The response of the system is recorded in both measurement planes so the amplitudes (2) (2) (2) (2) a3o and a4o as well as the phases β 3 and β 4 can be obtained. Test (2) (1) (1) (1) a4 = a4o eiβ 4 . (1) (1) (1) U1 = U1o eiϕ1 .278) (1) 3 1 2 4 µ (2) m (2) Uo (2) U (2) ϕ (2) ωt x1 ϕ1 ωt U 1o U1 x2 U2o ωt ϕ2 U2 a (2) 4o a (2) 4 (2) β4 β3 (2) (2) a 3o a3 x3 (2) ωt ωt Figure 62 An additional trial weight of mass m(2) (see Fig 62) is attached in the balancing plane 2 at the known (with respect to the key phasor’s mark) phase ϕ(2) and the know distance µ(2) .ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 154 An additionl trial weight of mass m(1) (see Fig 61) is attached in the balancing plane 1 at the known (with respect to the key phasor’s mark) phase ϕ(1) and the know distance µ(1) .277) (1) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) U2 a4 a3 = a3o eiβ 3 . U2 = U2o eiϕ2 . The amplitude of this force U (1) is (1) Uo = m(1) µ(1) ω2 (2. There is the following relationship between the measured parameters and the transfer functions.

282) Similarly.277 # ∙ Ã" ¸ µ∙ ¸! ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸¶ (1) a3 R31 (iω) R32 (iω) U1 a3 U1 + U (1) − = − (1) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) a4 U2 U2 a4 a4 = a4o eiβ 4 . U2 = U2o eiϕ2 . 2. the wanted complex imbalances U1 and U2 in the plane 1 and 2 may be computed from the equation 2.277 and 2.274 ¸−1 ∙ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ U1 R31 (iω) R32 (iω) a3 = (2.283) Now. (2) (2) (2) U1 = U1o eiϕ1 .274 from 2. ¸−1 ∙ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ U1 R31 (iω) R32 (iω) a3o eiβ 3 U1o eiϕ1 = = (2. if one subtracts equations 2.281) The formulated equations 2.280 one can get a − a3 a eiβ 3 − a3o eiβ 3 R32 (iω) = 3 (2) = 3o (2) (2) U Uo eiϕ a − a4 a eiβ 4 − a4o eiβ 4 R42 (iω) = 4 (2) = 4o (2) (2) U Uo eiϕ (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2.284) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) U2 a4 where a3 and a4 represent the know response of the system without the additional weights.280) (2) (2) U (2) = Uo eiϕ (2. (2) (2) (2) (2. # ∙ " ¸∙ ¸ (2) U1 R31 (iω) R32 (iω) a3 = (2) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) U2 + U (2) a4 a3 = a3o eiβ 3 .285) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) U2 a4o eiβ 4 U2o eiϕ2 . To achieve that let us subtract the equations 2. " # ∙ ¸ ∙ (1) ¸ (1) R31 (iω) R32 (iω) a3 − a3 U = (1) R41 (iω) R42 (iω) 0 a4 − a4 " # ∙ ¸ (1) a3 − a3 R31 (iω)U (1) = (1) R41 (iω)U (1) a4 − a4 a − a3 a eiβ 3 − a3o eiβ 3 R31 (iω) = 3 (1) = 3o (1) (1) U Uo eiϕ a − a4 a eiβ 4 − a4o eiβ 4 R41 (iω) = 4 (1) = 4o (1) (1) U Uo eiϕ (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 155 relationship between the measured parameters and the transfer functions.274 from 2.274.280 allow the unknown transfer functions and the wanted unbalances U1 and U2 to be computed.

286) These weights.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 156 The amplitudes U1o and U2o determine the weights m1 and m2 that should be attached in the balancing planes m1 = m2 U1 r1 ω 2 U2 = r2 ω 2 (2. 63) β 1 = 180o + ϕ1 β 2 = 180o + ϕ2 1 2 (2. to balance the rotor. should be place at angular position (see Fig.287) x1 5 3 3 x3 1 2 x2 4 x4 4 m1 r1 β1 ϕ1 U1o U1 m2 r2 β2 U2o ωt x1 ωt ωt x2 ϕ2 U2 Figure 63 .

290) x + ω 2 x = q cos ωt ¨ n u 2 0. a) mr µ ω 2 cosω t x mr µ ω 2 b) x µ ωt mr µ ω 2 cosω t K mr M M Figure 64 Let us assume that the system has the following parameters: M = 100 kg . 65 .002 2 ω = ω = . within the range of the rotor angular speed 0 < ω < 500 the system can be approximated by system with one degree of freedom.total mass of the ventilator mr = 20 kg . The following mathematical model M x + Kx = mr µω2 cos ωt ¨ (2. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ .distance between the axis of rotation and the centre of gravity u = mr µ = 20 · .mass of rotor of the ventilator K = 9000000 N/m . 64a).imbalance of the rotor The natural frequency of the system is r r K 9000000 = = 300 (2.0000 2ω 2 q= (2.0001 = . 64b).00 2 kgm .289) (2.291) M 100 allows the amplitude of the forced vibrations of the ventilator A to be predicted. as a function of the angular speed of the rotor is shown in Fig. Vibration of this ventilator are due to the imbalance u if its rotor.292) A=¯ 2 ω n − ω2 ¯ ¯ 3002 − ω 2 ¯ Its values. Its physical model is shown in Fig.288) ωn = M 100 Hence.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 157 2.2 Dynamic absorber of vibrations Let us consider vibration of the ventilator shown in Fig.0000 2ω 2 ¯ ¯ q ¯=¯ ¯ ¯ (2.3.stiﬀness of the supporting beam ω = 314 rad/s the ventilator’s operating speed µ = .0001 m .

elastic element of stiﬀness k and damper of the damping coeﬃcient c. results in the following mathematical model.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 158 0. Application of the Newton’s .0001 A1[m] 0 100 200 300 400 ω[ 1/s] Figure 65 As it can be seen from this diagram. Such a solution is not acceptable. One of a possible way of reducing these vibration is to furnish the ventilator with the absorber of vibration shown in ﬁg 66 a) mr µ ω 2 cosω t x b) x µ ωt mr µ ω 2 mr µ ω 2 cosω t K mr M k y k c m m y M c Figure 66 It comprises block of mass m.293) . the ventilator develops large vibration in vicinity of its working speed ω = 314 rad/s and has to pass the critical speed during the run up.Euler’s method. M x + (K + k)x − ky + cx − cy = uω2 cosωt ¨ ˙ ˙ m¨ − kx + ky − cx + cy = 0 y ˙ ˙ (2.

002 · ω2 ¯ ¯ + iω + 106 ¯ −ω2 ¯ 0 25 0 0 −2.5 −2.297) ∙ K + k −k −k +k ¸ ∙ uω2 0 ¸ ∙ x y ¸ k= .296) and than introduces it into the equation 2.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 159 Its matrix form is ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ uω 2 cos ωt x K + k −k x ˙ +c −c x ¨ M 0 = + + y −k +k y ˙ −c +c y ¨ 0 m 0 (2.297 one obtains the formula for the amplitude of the forced vibration ¯ ¯ (2.299) A = ¯(−ω2 m+iωc + k)−1 q¯ Amplitude A1 .298) (2.294) To analyze the forced vibrations let us introduce the complex excitation ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ M 0 x ¨ +c −c x ˙ K + k −k x + + = 0 m y ¨ −c +c ˙ ∙ ¸ ∙y 2 iωt −k ∙ +k ¸ y ¸ (2. 46 2. as a function of the angular speed of its rotor is presented in Fig.300 k = mω 2 = 25 · 3142 = 2. c= .295) uω 2 cos ωt + iuω 2 sin ωt uω e uω 2 iωt = = = e 0 0 0 Introducing notations ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ M 0 +c −c m= . ¸ ∙ A1 = A= A2 ¯µ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ¶−1 ∙ ¸¯ ¯ ¯ 100 0 0 0 11. x= (2. representing vibrations of the ventilator.300) m To show it let us assume m = 25 kg and compute the value of the stiﬀness k from the formula 2. q= . 4649 × 106 N/m Introduction of this data into equation 2. 46 0 ¯ ¯ (2. 46 0.299 and the zero damping results in the following response A1 and A2 of the system along the coordinates x and y respectively. 0 m −c +c The above equations takes form m¨ + cx + kx = qeiωt x ˙ If one predicts the particular solution as x = Aeiωt (2.301) . 67: Remarkable results we are getting if parameters k and m of the absorber fulﬁll the following relationship r k = ω = 314 (2.

computed according to the formula 2. Damping coeﬃcient lager then 5000 results in increment of the amplitude of the ventilator’s forced vibrations.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 160 0. The best results of attenuation of vibrations can be achieved if the two local maxima are equal to each other. . ∙ ¸ A1 = A2 ¸ ¸ ∙ ¸ ¸ ∙ ¶−1 ∙ ∙ µ c c 100 0 0. This case is shown in the last raw of the table 1. 46 0 (2.002 · ω2 11. The amplitude is less than 0. The relative motion is ceased and the system behaves like the undamped system with one degree of freedom.00004 m. It can be noticed. 46 2 3 6 10 + + iω 10 = −ω c c 0 25 −2.5 −2. To improve the dynamic response. But the ventilator still has to pass resonance in vicinity of ω = 240 rad/s. Application of the absorber of vibrations oﬀers a safe operation in region of the angular speed 0 < ω < 500 rad/s.0001 A1[m] 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s] Figure 67 One can notice that the amplitude of vibration for the working speed ω = 314 rad/s is equal to zero. If the damping tends to inﬁnity. that by increasing the damping coeﬃcient c one can lower amplitude of vibrations in all region of frequency. 46 2.302) The amplitudes of the forced vibration of the ventilator for diﬀerent values of the damping coeﬃcient c. let us analyze the inﬂuence of the damping coeﬃcient c.302 are collected in the Table 1.

0001 m = 25 k = 2. 46 × 106 c = 2500 A1[m] 0 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s] 0. Table 1 0.0001 m = 25 k = 2. 46 × 106 c = 1000 A1[m] 0 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s] 0.0001 m = 25 k = 2.75 × 106 c = 5000 A1[m] 0 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s] . 46 × 106 c=0 A1[m] 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s] 0.0001 m = 25 k = 2. 46 × 106 c = 5000 A1[m] 0 0 100 200 300 400 ω[1/s ] 0.0001 m = 25 k = 1.ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 161 .

t) that in a general case can be a function of time t and the position z. 1 A(z) stands for area of cross-section of the string and (z) is its density.1 Modelling of strings.Chapter 3 VIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 3. t) ∂y(z.1. 1.2) dm ∂t2 ∂z ∂z ∂z 2 .t) dz ∂z ∂ z2 2 y Figure 1 Strings are elastic elements that are subjected to tensile forces (see Fig. t) ∂ 2 y(z.t) z dz T A(z). ρ (z) T z ∂ y(z.t) ∂z ∂ y(z. 1).t) + ∂ y(z. t)dz (3. Let us consider element dz of the sting. It is assumed that the tensile force T is large enough to neglect its variations due to small motion of the string around its equilibrium position.1) The free body diagram of this element is shown in Fig. t) +T + = −T dz + f (z.t) T y(z. Its position is determined by the coordinate z and its mass dm is dm = A(z) (z)dz (3. Motion of the string is caused by the unit vertical load f (z. rods and shafts Modelling of stings f(z. t) ∂ 2 y(z. According to the second Newton’s law µ ¶ ∂y(z.1 MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 3. In the Fig.

t) F(z.t) z dz dz E(z).MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 163 Introduction of Eq. 3. 3.t) F(z.t) F(z. A q(z. t) A (3. t) ∂ 2 y(z.3) If one divide this equation by A(z) (z)dz it takes form ∂ 2 y(z. A(z).2 and its simpliﬁcation yields A(z) (z) ∂ 2 y(z.t) z F(z. t) = f (z.t) + ∂ F(z. ρ (z) F(z.t) + ∂ F(z. t) ∂ 2 y(z. t)dz ∂t2 ∂z 2 (3. t) − λ2 = q(z.t) dz ∂z y(z.4) If the string is uniform ( A and ρ are independent of z ) the equation of motion is ∂ 2 y(z. t) T f (z.5) (3. t) ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = Modelling of rods T .6) f(z.t) dz ∂z z Figure 2 . t) − = 2 2 ∂t A(z) (z) ∂z A(z) (z) (3.1 into Eq. t) dz − T dz = f (z. t) ∂ 2 y(z.

t) 2 ∂ y(z. E.MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 164 Rods are elastic elements that are subjected to the axial forces. dm ∂ 2 y(z. t)dz − ∂t2 ∂z ∂z Since mass of the element is dm = A(z) (z)dz the equation of motion of the element is µ ¶ ∂ 2 y(z.t) dz ∂z dz = A(z)E(z) ∂y(z. Its instantaneous position is determined by the displacement y(z. 2 element dz. t) ∂y(z. t)dz = −F (z.11) (3. t) dz + f (z.7 one may obtain µ ¶ ∂ 2 y(z. t) + F (z. t) ∂t2 ∂z 2 (3. can be a function of position z and time t. Motion of the rod is excited by the axial force f (z. t) − ∂t2 ∂z ∂z If the rod is uniform ( A. Young’s modulus E(z) and the density (z).7) The axial force F (z. q(z. t) ∂F (z. 3. t) ∂ A(z) (z) A(z)E(z) = f (z.10) (3.13) .8) Upon introducing the above expression into Eq. Application of the second Newton’s law to the free body diagram of the element yields.9) (3. t) = f (z. t) ∂y(z. t) ∂z (3. t). Let as consider a rod of the cross-section A(z). t) A (3. t) + ∂t2 ∂z (3.12) where λ2 = E . t) −λ = q(z. t) ∂ dm A(z)E(z) dz = f (z. in a general case. t) is related to the elongation of the element by Hooke’s law F (z. are constant) one can get 2 ∂ 2 y(z. t) = A(z)E(z) ∂y(z. t) that. Let us consider the highlighted in Fig.

Its moment of inertia ∂z about the axis z is Z Z 2 dI = r dA (z)dz = (z)dz r2 dA = J(z) (z)dz (3. Let us assume that the torque τ (z. The shaft has the shear modulus G(z). J(z). t). t). ρ (z) ϕ (z. t) + T (z. The angular position at the distance z + dz is by the total diﬀerential ∂ϕ(z.t) ϕ ϕ (z. Due to the moment τ (z.14) A A Owning to the generalized Newton’s law we can write the following equation dI ∂ 2 ϕ(z. the density (z). t)dz ∂t2 ∂z (3.t) dz ∂z z Figure 3 Shafts are elastic elements that are subjected to torques. t) is distributed along the axis z and is a function of time t (see Fig.t) dz greater. 3). t) + dz + τ (z.t) z dz T(z.MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 165 Modelling of shafts G(z). Let us consider the element dz of the shaft.t) + ∂ T(z. A(z). the shaft performs the torsional vibrations and the instantaneous angular position of the cross-section at z is ϕ(z.t) z T(z. the cross-section area A(z) and the second moment of area J(z).t) ϕ (z. t) ∂T (z.t) dz ∂z ϕ (z. t) = −T (z.t) τ (z.t) + ∂ (z.15) .

t) − M(z. t) (3. t) ∂ϕ(z. The beam performs vibrations due to the external distributed unit load f (z. t) = ∂z Since mass of the element dz is dm = A(z) (z)dz (3.24) . t) J (3.17) (3. sum of the moments about the point G has to be equal to zero µ ¶ µ ¶ ∂V (z. t) + dz = 0 V (z. t) − dz + f (z.16 we are getting µ ¶ ∂ϕ(z.19) where λ2 = G . The equation of motion of the beam in the z direction is dm ∂ 2 y(z.14 and an elementary simpliﬁcation the equation 3.18) (3. t). t) ∂ ∂ 2 ϕ(z. t) = τ (z. t) 2 ∂ ϕ(z. t) − G(z)J(z) J(z) (z) ∂t2 ∂z ∂z If J(z). Let us consider a beam of the second moment of area J(z). t) −λ = q(z.23) V (z.2 Modelling of beams Beams are elastic elements that are subjected to lateral loads (forces or moments that have their vectors perpendicular to the centre line of a beam). t) (3. t) + V (z. 3. q(z. t) ∂T (z. cross-section A(z). The instantaneous position of the element dz is highlighted in Fig.MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 166 After introduction of Eq.20) 3. (z) and G(z) are constant.15 takes form ∂ 2 ϕ(z. 3. t)dz ∂t2 ∂z (3. ∂M(z.22) Simpliﬁcation of the above equation and omission of the terms of order higher then one with respect to dz. 4.16) − ∂t2 ∂z If we introduce the relationship between the torque T (z. t) + 2 ∂z 2 ∂z (3. 2 ∂ 2 ϕ(z.21) If one neglect the inertia moment associated with rotation of the element dz. t) − V (z. t) = τ (z. t) dz dz + M(z. the equation of motion takes form. t) T (z. t) ∂t2 ∂z 2 (3. yields the relationship between the bending moment M and the shearing force V. t) J(z) (z) = τ (z. t) dz ∂M(z. t)dz dz = ∂z G(z)J(z) into Eq. t) and the deﬂection ϕ(z.1. t) = +V (z. t) ∂V (z. density (z) and the Young’s modulus E(z).

23.26 into equation 3. t) = f (z. one can get the equation of motion in the following form ∂ 2 y(z.t) M(z.29) .26) V(z.27) are constant. A(z).28) (3.t)dz M(z.25) ∂t2 ∂z 2 The mechanics of solids oﬀers the following relationship between the deﬂection of the beam y(z.MODELLING OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 167 f(z. t) + 2 E(z)J(z) ∂t2 ∂z ∂z 2 M(z. t) and the bending moment M(z. t) ∂ 2 y(z. t) (3. A q(z.J(z). t) A (3.t)+ ∂ ∂z E(z). t) + λ2 = q(z. t) ∂z 2 Introduction of equation 3. t) ∂ 4 y(z. ∂ 2 y(z.t) dz/2 z y Figure 4 and taking into account Eq. t). t) ∂M 2 (z.t) z f(z. t) ∂2 A(z) (z) = f (z.t) y(z. E and beam is governed by the following equation (3.t) G V(z.t) dz ∂z M(z. motion of the ∂ 2 y(z. t) A(z) (z) + = f (z. t) = E(z)J(z) If the following parameters of the beam A.ρ (z) dz (3. t) ∂t2 ∂z 4 where λ2 = EJ .t) + ∂ V(z. 3.25 yields µ ¶ ∂ 2 y(z. J.

is sum of the general solution of the homogeneous equation and the particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation. 3. rods and shafts are described by the same mathematical model.30 ∂ 2 y(z.32) Introduction of the predicted solution 3.32 into equation 3. y(z. rods and shafts The free vibrations (natural vibrations) are governed by the homogeneous equation of Eq. Therefore.1 Free vibration of strings. One of them is a function of the position z and the other one is a function of time t.30) is classiﬁed as linear partial diﬀerential equation of two variables ( z and t ) with constant coeﬃcients ( λ2 ).33) for strings for rods (3.natural frequencies and natural modes Let us predict the particular solution of the above equation in a form of the product of two functions.31 yields the following ordinary diﬀerential equation −ω 2 Y (z) − λ2 Y II (z) = 0 n or Y II (z) + β 2 Y (z) = 0 n where βn = The general solution of this equation is Yn (z) = Sn sin β n z + Cn cos β n z where β n = ωn r A T r (3.37) (3. t) ∂ 2 y(z. t) − λ2 =0 (3.30 describes the free vibration of the system due to a non-zero initial excitation determined by the initial conditions.2. In this case the governing equation ∂ 2 y(z. t) − λ2 = q(z. 3. its analysis can be discussed simultaneously.2 ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS As could be seen from the previous section. t) ∂t2 ∂z 2 (3. a function of two variables.34) (3.38) β n = ωn E . t) = Y (z) sin ω n t (3. t) = 0. the equation 3. vibrations of strings. t) ∂ 2 y(z.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 168 3.31) ∂t2 ∂z 2 Boundary conditions . The strict solution can be produced only if parameters of the system considered are constant. The general solution.36) ωn λ (3.35) (3. If the external excitation q(z.

Some of the boundary conditions for strings. rods and shafts are shown in the following table.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 169 β n = ωn The values for the parameter β n as well as the constants Sn and Cn should be chosen to fulﬁll the boundary conditions.39) . r G for shafts (3.

1 z l y string for for z = 0 Yn = 0 z = l Yn = 0 z l free-free rod for for I z = 0 F = AEYn = 0 I z = l F = AEYn = 0 z l ﬁxed-free rod for for z = 0 Yn = 0 I z = l F = AEYn = 0 k z l ﬁxed-elasticaly supported rod for for z = 0 Yn = 0 I z = l F = AEYn = −kYn z l ﬁxed-ﬁxed rod for for z = 0 Yn = 0 z = l Yn = 0 z l free-free shaft for for I z = 0 T = GJYn = 0 I z = l T = GJYn = 0 z l ﬁxed free shaft for for z=0 z=l Yn = 0 I T = GJYn = 0 z l ﬁxed-ﬁxed shaft for for z=0 z=l Yn = 0 Yn = 0 .ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 170 Table 3.

.46) ωn = β n l For each of this natural frequencies the set of equations 3.36. the natural modes determine the angular positions of the cross-section of the shaft ϕ(z).44) This equation is called characteristic equation and has inﬁnite number of solution.. according to 3.41 becomes linearly dependant and one of the constants can be chosen arbitrarily... . 2.36. In the case of free vibrations of the shaft....39 one can compute the natural frequencies to be p β n = ωn G s s G nπ G = n = 1.. Therefore we can conclude that the predicted solution.... The above analysis allows to conclude that a continuous system possesses inﬁnite number of the natural frequencies and inﬁnite number of the corresponding natural modes... A few ﬁrst of them are shown in Fig.40) Introduction of this boundary conditions into the solution 3..41.∞ (3.45) l l l Taking advantage of equation 3.say Sn = 1. . .. β2 = . ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 ¯ 1 ¯ ¯ (3.47) l The functions Yn (z)are called eigenfunctions or natural modes and the corresponding roots ω n are called eigenvalues or natural frequencies.. The ﬁrst mode is called fundamental mode and the corresponding frequency is called fundamental natural frequency. For this case the boundary conditions are for for z = 0 z = l Yn = 0 Yn = 0 (3.43) ¯ sin β n l cos β n l ¯ = 0 Hence...42) = sin β n l cos β n l 0 Cn This set of equations has non-zero solutions if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero. . Since β n and l are always positive....∞ (3. results in a set of two homogeneous algebraic equations linear with respect to the constants Sn and Cn . Cn has to be equal to 0. 0 = 0 · Sn + 1 · Cn 0 = (sin β n l)Sn + (cos β n l)Cn Its matrix form is ∙ (3.∞ (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 171 To demonstrate the way of the determination of the natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes.. 5 .... 2. in this particular case we have sin β n l = 0 (3. in the case considered is nπ Yn (z) = sin β n z = sin z n = 1. If one choose arbitrarily Sn . n = 1. according to the ﬁrst equation of the set 3..41) ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ 0 1 Sn 0 (3. let us consider the ﬁxed on both ends shaft (last row of the above Table). 2. . only positive roots of the above equation has the physical meaning π 2π nπ β1 = . β n = .

ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 172 1 ϕ (z) 0. Hence Z l Z l ³ ¯l ´ 2 2 I ¯ − λ2 ωi Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ Yi (z)Yj (z) 0 YiI (z)YjI (z)dz = 0 0 0 Z l Z l ³ ´ ¯l ω2 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz + λ2 YJI (z)Yi (z)¯0 − λ2 YiI (z)YjI (z)dz = 0 (3.33 −ω 2 Y (z) − λ2 Y II (z) = 0 n Hence −ω 2 Yi (z) − λ2 YiII (z) = 0 i 2 −ω j Yj (z) − λ2 YjII (z) = 0 (3.48) (3.50) j 0 0 The second integrals can be integrated by parts.49 by Yi (z) and then integrating them side by side one can get Z l Z l 2 2 ωi Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ YiII (z)Yj (z)dz = 0 0 0 Z l Z l ω2 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz + λ2 YjII (z)Yi (z)dz = 0 (3. Both of them must fulﬁll the equation 3.48 by Yj (z) and the equation 3.49) Premultiplying the equation 3.51) j 0 0 Substraction of the second equation from the ﬁrst one yields Z ³¡ ¡ 2 ¢¯l ¡ I ¢¯ ´ ¢ l 2 2 I ¯ − YJ (z)Yi (z) ¯l = 0 ωi − ωj Yi (z)Yj (z) 0 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz + λ 0 0 (3.4 0.5 z l=1 -1 Figure 5 Orthogonality of the natural modes Let us consider two arbitrarily chosen natural modes Yi (z) and Yj (z).5 0 0.2 0.6 0.52) .8 z 1 -0.

57) Hence. t) = Y (z) sin ω n t (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 173 It is easy to show that for any boundary conditions the second expression is equal to zero ¡ I ¢¯l ¡ ¢¯l Yi (z)Yj (z) ¯0 − YJI (z)Yi (z) ¯0 = YiI (l)Yj (l)−YiI (0)Yj (0)−YJI (l)Yi (l)+YJI (0)Yi (0) = 0 (3.. Z l Yj (z)Yi (z)dz = 0 (3. t) = Yn (z) sin ωn t n = 1.59) ∂t To produce the constant Sn and Cn let us introduce the solution 3.∞ (3. 3. t) = Yn (z) cos ωn t n = 1.31 is of second order with respect to time.. 0) = V0 (z) (3. y(z.53) Hence.58) This solution has to fulﬁll the initial conditions. This operation results in the following two equations. Y0 (z) = V0 (z) = ∞ X n=1 ∞ X n=1 Cn Yn (z) Sn ωn Yn (z) (3. The initial conditions determine the initial position Y0 (z) and the initial velocity V0 (z) of the system considered for the time t equal to zero.. yn (z. t) = ∞ X n=1 Sn Yn (z) sin ω n t + Cn Yn (z) cos ω n t (3.56) Since the equation 3. 3.60) .31 can be adopted in the following form y(z. yn (z... It the same manner as it was done in the previous section one may prove that the following functions form the required linearly independent set of solution. to fulﬁll initial conditions we need second set of linearly independent solution. 2. 2.. the general solution of the equation 3.58 into the above initial conditions.31 eventually may be adopted in the following form. 0) = Y0 (z) y(z..54) 0 The above property of the eigenfunctions is called orthogonality condition.∞ (3. ∂ y(z..32 one of the particular solution of the equation 3.55) At this stage of consideration the function Y (z) is known and we are able to produce inﬁnite number of such particular solutions. General solution of the homogeneous equation According to 3.

t) + λ2 = q(z.66) .47.65) ∂t2 ∂z 4 Boundary conditions . t) ∂ 4 y(z. t) (3. the equation 3. t) = 0.64) ∂t2 ∂z 4 This equation can be classiﬁed as linear partial diﬀerential equation of two variables ( z and t ) with constant coeﬃcients ( λ2 ). let us predict the solution of the above equation in the form of a product of two functions. let us multiply the above equations by Ym (z) and then integrate them side by side Z l ∞ X Z l Y0 (z)Ym (z)dz = Cn Yn (z)Ym (z)dz 0 Z l V0 (z)Ym (z)dz = 0 For the example considered in the previous section the above formulae.54 the wanted constants Sn and Cn are Rl Y0 (z)Yn (z)dz Cn = 0 R l Y 2 (z)dz 0 n Rl 1 0 V0 (z)Yn (z)dz (3. One of them is a function of the position z and the other is the function of time t.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 174 To determine the unknown constants Sn and Cn .64 describes the free vibration of the beam due to a non-zero initial conditions.63) ¢l R ¡ ω n l sin nπ z 2 dz 0 l Taking advantage of the developed orthogonality conditions 3. If the external excitation q(z. t) + λ2 =0 (3. ∂ 2 y(z. take form Rl Y (z) sin nπ zdz 0 0 Cn = R l ¡ ¢l2 nπ sin l z dz 0 Rl 1 0 V0 (z) sin nπ zdz Sn = (3. The general solution. a function of two variables. The free vibrations (natural vibrations) are governed by the homogeneous equation of 3. is sum of the general solution of the homogeneous equation and the particular solution of the non-homogeneous equation.61) 0 3.natural frequencies and natural modes Similarly to the analysis of strings and shafts. t) = Y (z) sin ω n t (3.62) Sn = Rl 2 ωn Yn (z)dz 0 n=1 ∞ X n=1 0 Sn ω n Z l Yn (z)Ym (z)dz (3.2. y(z.64. Its order with respect to time is 2 and with respect to z is equal to 4. t) ∂ 4 y(z.2 Free vibrations of beams For the uniform beam the equation of motion was derived to be ∂ 2 y(z. according to 3.

67) ω2 Aρ 2 n ω 2 = EJ n λ The standard form of its particular solution is Y (z) = erz r4 = β 4 n Its roots r1 = β n Y1 (z) = eβ n z determine the set of the linearly independent particular solution.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 175 Introduction of the predicted solution 3.72) (3.69) (3. 4 Y (z) 1 Y (z) 2 2 Y (z) 3 Y (z) 4 -4 -2 0 2 4 z -2 -4 Figure 6 . 6.70) (3.68) (3. Y2 (z) = e−β n z Y3 (z) = eiβ n z Y1 (z) = e−iβ n z r2 = −β n r3 = iβ n r2 = −iβ n (3. one can choose their combinations as the set of the independent solutions eβ n z − e−β n z eβ n z + e−β n z = sinh β n z Y2 (z) = = cosh β n z Y1 (z) = 2 2 eiβ n z − e−iβ n z eiβ n z + e−iβ n z Y3 (z) = = sin β n z Y2 (z) = = cos β n z (3.66 into equation 3.73) Introduction of this solution into the equation 3.68 yields the characteristic equation Alternatively.65 yields the following ordinary diﬀerential equation −ω 2 Y (z) + λ2 Y IV (z) = 0 n or where Y IV (z) − β 4 Y (z) = 0 n β4 = n (3.71) (3.74) 2 2 A graphical interpretation of these functions for β n = 1 is given in Fig.

77) II Yn (z) = An β 2 sinh β n z + Bn β 2 cosh β n z − Cn β 2 sin β n z − Dn β 2 cos β n z n n n n (3. Yn (z) = An sinh β n z + Bn cosh β n z + Cn sin β n z + Dn cos β n z (3.75) Values for the parameter β n as well as for the constants An . Cn and Dn should be chosen to fulﬁll boundary conditions.79) The boundary conditions for some cases of beams are shown in Table 3. Table 3. as a linear combination of these particular solutions is Yn (z) = An sinh β n z + Bn cosh β n z + Cn sin β n z + Dn cos β n z (3. They involve the function Y (z) and its ﬁrst three derivatives with respect to z.2 O l Y z free-free beam O l Y z for for for for for for for for for for for for for for for for z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z =0 =0 =l =l =0 =0 =l =l =0 =0 =l =l =0 =0 =l =l M(0) = EJY II (0) = 0 V (0) = EJY III (0) = 0 M(l) = EJY II (l) = 0 V (l) = EJY III (l) = 0 Y (0) = 0 Y I (0) = 0 M(l) = EJY II (l) = 0 V (l) = EJY III (l) = 0 Y (0) = 0 M(0) = EJY II (0) = 0 Y (l) = 0 Y I (l) = 0 M(0) = EJY II (0) = 0 V (0) = EJY III (0) = −kY (0) M(l) = EJY II (l) = 0 V (l) = EJY III (l) = +kY (l) ﬁxed-free beam O l Y z pined-ﬁxed beam O k l Y k z elasticaly supported beam .78) I Yn (z) = An β 3 cosh β n z + Bn β 3 sinh β n z − Cn β 3 cos β n z = Dn β 3 sin β n z n n n n (3.2. Bn .76) I Yn (z) = An β n cosh β n z + Bn β n sinh β n z + Cn β n cos β n z − Dn β n sin β n z (3. one has to produce four boundary conditions reﬂecting the conditions at both ends of the beam.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 176 The general solution of the equation 3. Since this equation is of fourth order.68.

Since the beam considered is free-free in space.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 177 Let us take advantage of the boundary conditions corresponding to the freefree beam in order to determine the natural frequencies and the natural modes.81) n n n n 0 Dn β 3 cosh β n l β 3 sinh β n l −β 3 cos β n l β 3 sin β n l n n n n As one can see from the diagram 7. These two modes. third and fourth equation we are getting ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ Bn 0 −1 0 1 ⎣ cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ⎦ ⎣ Cn ⎦ = − ⎣ sinh β n l ⎦ An sinh β n l − cos β n l sin β n l cosh β n l Dn ⎡ (3.84) Introduction of the functions 3.78 and 3. since its characteristic determinant is zero. Solution of this equation.81. becomes linearly dependant.80) They have a non-zero solution if and only if their characteristic determinant is equal to zero. This condition forms the characteristic equation ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 ¯ 1 0 −1 ¯ ¯ ¯ 1 ¯ 0 −1 0 ¯ ¯ (3. If we take advantage of the second. Cn and Dn . Therefore.83) This characteristic equation is transcendental and therefore has inﬁnite number of roots. ⎡ ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ 0 β2 0 −β 2 0 An n n 3 ⎢ β3 ⎥ ⎢ Bn ⎥ ⎢ 0 ⎥ 0 −β n 0 ⎢ n ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎣ β 2 sinh β n l β 2 cosh β n l −β 2 sin β n l −β 2 cos β n l ⎦ ⎣ Cn ⎦ = ⎣ 0 ⎦ (3. takes the following form cosh β n l cos β n l − 1 = 0 (3.85 β 3 l = 11. 8a) and b). Bn ... it is possible to choose arbitrarily one of the constants (for example An ) and the other can be obtained from three arbitrarily chosen equations 3. (3. the characteristic equation has double root of zero magnitude....85) . this root is associated with the possible translation and rotation of the beam as a rigid body. after simpliﬁcation.81.73 β 2 l = 7..82) ¯ sinh β n l cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ¯ = 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ cosh β n l sinh β n l − cos β n l sin β n l ¯ that. corresponding to the zero root are shown in Fig. For any root of the characteristic equation the set of equations 3. 7 The ﬁrst few roots are β 0 l = 0 β 1 l = 4.. within a limited range of the parameter β n l is shown in Fig. for for for for z z z z =0 =0 =l =l M(0) = EJY II (0) = 0 V (0) = EJY III (0) = 0 M(l) = EJY II (l) = 0 V (l) = EJY III (l) = 0 (3.. Modes corresponding to the non-zero roots can be produced according to the following procedure.79 into the above boundary conditions results in the following set of algebraic equations that are linear with respect to the constants An .

73 − sin 4.75 is Y1 (z) = −1.73 D1 sinh 4.73z + 1.89) n Aρ l2 Aρ Eventually.0177 cos 4. Modes for β 2 l = 7. C1 and D1 ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤−1 ⎡ ⎤ B1 1 0 −1 0 1. 3.0 sinh 4.0 sin 4.87) Hence. 8d) and e) respectively.69 allows the natural frequencies to be computed.73 ⎦ ⎣ sinh 4.73 sin 4.73z − 1.73 the above set of equations yields values for constants B1 .0178 cosh 4. t) = Sn Yn (z) sin ω n t (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 178 20 cosh βn l cosβn l -1=0 10 β0 l 0 β1 l 5 β2 l β3 l 10 15 βn l -10 -20 Figure 7 Hence.73z (3.73 − cos 4. for An = −1 we have ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤−1 ⎡ ⎤ Bn 0 −1 0 1 ⎣ Cn ⎦ = ⎣ cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ⎦ ⎣ sinh β n l ⎦ sinh β n l − cos β n l sin β n l cosh β n l Dn (3.73 ⎦ = ⎣ −1.66. The formula 3.85 and β 3 l = 11 are shown in Fig.0 ⎦ cosh 4.86) For the ﬁrst non-zero root β 1 l = 4.73 − cos 4. s s EJ (β n l)2 EJ ωn = β 2 = (3.73z + 1.73 1. In the same manner one can produce modes for all the other characteristic roots.0177 (3. according to Eq. 8c).017 8 ⎣ C1 ⎦ = ⎣ cosh 4.90) .88) Its graphical representation is shown in Fig. the corresponding mode. taking into account the predicted solution 3. the particular solution is y(z.

8 1 c) 1 Y (z) 1 0 -1 -2 2 1 Y2 (z) 0.4 0.6 0.4 z 0.8 1 z d) 0 -1 -2 0.4 z 0.2 0.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 179 2 Y0 (z) 1 a) 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.8 1 2 1 Y3 (z) e) 0 -1 -2 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.4 z 0.6 0.8 1 0 -1 -2 2 1 Y0 (z) z b) 0 -1 -2 2 0.8 1 Figure 8 .

...0178 cosh 4. It follows that the following linear combination n=∞ X Yn (z) (Sn sin ωn t + Cn cos ω n t) (3. The constants Sn and Cn should be chosen to fulﬁll the initial conditions..ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 180 where Yn (z) and ωn are uniquely determined and Sn is an arbitrarily chosen constant.....96) j 0 0 The second integrals can be integrated by parts.67 −ω 2 Y (z) + λ2 Y IV (z) = 0 n Hence −ω2 Yi (z) + λ2 YiIV (z) = 0 i −ω 2 Yj (z) + λ2 YjIV (z) = 0 j (3.....94) (3. In the same manner we can show that the function y(z..73z (3. .. Both of them must fulﬁll the equation 3.....0 sin 4......73z + 1. t) = Cn Yn (z) cos ω n t (3.....95 by Yi (z) and then integrating them side by side one can get Z l Z l 2 2 −ω i Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ YiIV (z)Yj (z)dz = 0 0 0 Z l Z l −ω 2 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz + λ2 YjIV (z)Yi (z)dz = 0 (3.. Orthogonality of the natural modes Let us consider two arbitrarily chosen natural modes Yi (z) and Yj (z)..73z − 1. Hence Z l Z l ³ ¯l ´ 2 2 III ¯ − λ2 −ω i Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ Yi (z)Yj (z) 0 YiIII (z)YjI (z)dz = 0 0 0 Z l Z l ³ ¯l ´ −ω2 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz + λ2 YJIII (z)Yi (z)¯0 − λ2 YiIII (z)YjI (z)dz = 0 j 0 0 (3..93) Y2 (z) = .95) Premultiplying the equation 3...91) where is the linearly independent particular solution too.0 sinh 4.73z + 1..65.92) n=1 Y1 (z) = −1..94 by Yj (z) and the equation 3..97) .. is the general solution of the equation 3..0177 cos 4....

101) 0 The above property of the natural modes is called orthogonality condition and play a very important role in further development of the theory of vibrations.100) depends exclusively on boundary conditions. Hence. . Z l Yj (z)Yi (z)dz = 0 (3. It is easy to show that for any possible boundary conditions this expression is equal to zero.99) The expression ³ ³ ³ ¯l ´ 2 ³ II ¯´ ¯´ ¯´ 2 III ¯ +λ Yi (z)YjI (z)¯l +λ2 YjIII (z)Yi (z)¯l −λ2 YjII (z)YiI (z)¯l −λ Yi (z)Yj (z) 0 0 0 0 (3.98) Substraction of the second equation from the ﬁrst one yields ¢Rl ¡ 2 ω i − ω 2 0 Yj (z)Yi (z)dz+ ´ j ³ ³ ¯l ¯l ´ −λ2 YiIII (z)Yj (z)¯0 + λ2 YiII (z)YjI (z)¯0 ³ ³ ¯l ´ ¯´ 2 III ¯ − λ2 YjII (z)YiI (z)¯l = 0 +λ Yj (z)Yi (z) 0 0 (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 181 Let us apply the same procedure to the last integral again ³ ¯l ´ Rl −ω 2 0 Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ2 YiIII (z)Yj (z)¯0 + i ³ ¯l ´ Rl −λ2 YiII (z)YjI (z)¯0 + λ2 0 YiII (z)YjII (z)dz = 0 −ω j R 2 l ¯l ´ Yi (z)Yj (z)dz + λ2 YjIII (z)Yi (z)¯0 + 0 ³ ¯l ´ Rl 2 II I −λ Yj (z)Yi (z)¯0 + λ2 0 YiII (z)YjII (z)dz = 0 ³ (3.

9 produce equation for its natural frequencies. . A1. ρ2.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 182 3. A2.2. ρ1. J1 G2. J2 z l1 l2 Figure 9 For the shaft shown in Fig.3 Problems Problem 41 G1.

according to 3.104) (3. t) = Φ1 (z) sin ω n t ϕ2 (z.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 183 Solution For 0 < z < l1 (3. according to 3. is governed by the following equation ∂ 2 ϕ1 (z. t) − λ2 =0 1 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = 1 Similarly.19. t) = Φ2 (z) sin ω n t (3.109) Introduction of these solutions into the equations of motion yields.110) (3.106) where λ2 = 2 G2 2 (3. ΦII (z) + β 2 Φ1 (z) = 0 1 n1 II Φ2 (z) + β 2 Φ2 (z) = 0 n2 where β n1 = (3. The second and the third condition represent the continuity of the angular .108) (3. t) ∂ 2 ϕ1 (z.113) The ﬁrst boundary condition reﬂects the fact that the left hand end of the shaft is ﬁxed.107) Both parts of the shaft must have the same natural frequencies. t) 2 ∂ ϕ2 (z.103) G1 1 (3.112) λ1 λ2 These two equations are coupled together by the following boundary conditions for for for for z z z z = = = = 0 l1 l1 l1 + l2 Φ1 (0) = 0 Φ1 (l1 ) = Φ2 (l1 ) G1 J1 ΦI (l1 ) = G2 J2 ΦI (l1 ) 1 2 ΦI (l1 + l2 ) = 0 2 (3.34.111) ωn ωn β n2 = (3. one may say that within range l1 < z < l1 + l2 motion of the shaft is governed by 2 ∂ 2 ϕ2 (z.102) motion of the system.105) (3. Therefore the particular solution of the above equations must be of the following form ϕ1 (z. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 (3.

116) (3.110 and 3. Since the general solution of equation 3.115) (3.111are ωn ωn z + Cn1 cos z λ1 λ1 ωn ωn Φ2 (z) = Sn2 sin z + Cn2 cos z λ2 λ2 Φ1 (z) = Sn1 sin the formulated boundary conditions results in the following set of equations Cn1 = 0 Sn1 sin ωn l1 + Cn1 cos ωn l1 − Sn2 sin ωn l2 − Cn2 cos ωn l2 = 0 λ1 λ1 λ2 λ2 Sn1 G1 J1 ωn cos ωn l1 − Cn1 G1 J1 ωn sin ωn l1 + λ1 λ1 λ1 λ1 −Sn2 G2 J2 ωn cos ωn l1 + Cn2 G2 J2 ωn sin ωn l1 = 0 λ2 λ2 λ2 λ2 +Sn2 ωn cos ωn (l1 + l2 ) − Cn2 ωn sin ωn (l1 + l2 ) = 0 λ2 λ2 λ2 λ2 Its matrix for is ⎤ Sn1 ⎢ C ⎥ [A] ⎢ n1 ⎥ = 0 ⎣ Sn2 ⎦ Cn2 1 0 ωn cos λ1 l1 − sin ωn l2 λ2 −G1 J1 ωn sin ωn l1 −G2 J2 ωn cos ωn l1 λ1 λ1 λ2 λ2 ωn 0 cos ωn (l1 +l2 ) λ2 λ2 ⎡ (3. The last condition says that the torque at the free end is zero.118) Solution of this equation for the roots ω n yields the wanted natural frequencies of the shaft.114) (3. This homogeneous set of equations has acteristic determinant is equal to zero. ¯ ¯ 0 1 ¯ ¯ sin ωn l1 cos ωn l1 λ1 λ1 ¯ ¯ G1 J1 ωn cos ωn l1 −G1 J1 ωn sin ωn l1 λ1 λ1 λ1 λ1 ¯ ¯ 0 0 0 ⎢ sin ωn l1 λ1 [A] = ⎢ ⎣ G1 J1 ωn cos ωn l1 λ1 λ1 0 the non-zero solutions if and only if its char0 − sin ωn l2 λ2 −G2 J2 ωn cos ωn l1 λ2 λ2 ωn cos ωn (l1 +l2 ) λ2 λ2 0 − cos ωn l2 λ2 G2 J2 ωn sin ωn l1 λ2 λ2 − ωn sin ωn (l1 +l2 ) λ2 λ2 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯= 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ ⎤ 0 ⎥ − cos ωn l2 λ2 ⎥ ωn ωn G2 J2 λ2 sin λ2 l1 ⎦ − ωn sin ωn (l1 +l2 ) λ2 λ2 .117) where ⎡ (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 184 displacement and continuity of the torque.

ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 185 Problem 42 1 E. 10.ρ l 2 m z Figure 10 The uniform rod 1 . Compute the natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes of this assembly. is connected to the block 2 of mass m.A . . shown in Fig.

t) ¯ ¯ = −AE ∂y(z. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = E (3. t) = −F (l.32) y(z. is m ∂ 2 y(l.8 ¯ ¯ ¯ ∂ 2 y(z.t) ¯ ∂y(z.t) ¯ m ∂t2 ¯ = −AE ∂z ¯ z=l (3.124) z=l Introduction of the particular solution (see Eq. l F(l. t) ∂ 2 y(z.119.120) To produce the boundary conditions let us consider the block 2 with the adjusted inﬁnitesimal element (see Fig.t) m z Figure 11 Equation of motion of the block. t) ¯ m ∂t2 ¯z=l ∂z ¯z=l y(0.125) . t) = ¯ 0 ¯ ∂ 2 y(z.t) y y(l. is ∂ 2 y(z. t) = 0 forms boundary conditions for the equation 3. ( y(0.122) This equation together with the condition corresponding to the upper end of the rod (3.119) (3.12. 11). 3. t) = Y (z) sin ω n t (3. according to the Newton’s law. according to Eq. 3.121) or.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 186 Solution The equation of motion of the rod. t) ∂t2 (3. taking advantage of the relationship 3.123) (3.

127) βn = ωn λ (3.7m/s ρ mr = A × l × ρ = 19.0 n f (ωn ) = tan =0 − 5188.131) For the following numerical data l = 1m E = 2. n with boundary conditions ½ Y (0) = 0 mω2 Y (l) − AEY I (l) = 0 n (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 187 into the equation of motion 3. 12.126.7 ωn Its solution f (ω = 0 is shown in Fig.5kg . according to 3.124 yields the ordinary diﬀerential equation Y II (z) + β 2 Y (z) = 0.126) The general solution of the equation 3.130) Hence.133) . (3.1 × 1011 N/m2 A = 25 × 10−4 m2 ρ = 7800kg/m3 q λ = E = 5188.128) Introduction of this solution into boundary conditions yields ½ Cn = 0 mω2 (Sn sin β n z + Cn cos β n z) − AE (Sn β n cos β n z − Cn β n sin β n z) = 0 n (3.129) or ¢ ¡ 2 mω n sin β n z − AEβ n cos β n z Sn = 0 mω 2 sin n or after simpliﬁcation tan ωn AE l− =0 λ λωn m (3.mass of the rod m = 20kg .36.132) ωn ωn ωn z − AE cos z = 0 λ λ λ (3. is (3.119 and the boundary conditions 3. after taking advantage of 3. the characteristic equation.mass of the block the characteristic equation takes the following form ³ ω ´ 5059. is Yn (z) = Sn sin β n z + Cn cos β n z (3.126.

7 Y3 (z) = sin 33400 z 5188. 13.128.7 (3.5 -1 Figure 12 The ﬁrst three natural frequencies. according to 3. 14 and 15 respectively. . are Yn (z) = Sn sin β n z = Sn sin ωn ωn z = Sn sin z λ 5188.1 × 1011 × 25 × 10−4 ω1 = (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 188 1 f( ω n ) 0.If we neglect the mass of the rod.7 Y2 (z) = sin 17720 z 5188. ω 2 = 17720.5 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 ωn -0. the system becomes of one degree of freedom and its the only one natural frequency is r r r k EA 2.134) The corresponding natural modes. ω1 = 33400 s−1 (3. according to the diagram 12 are ω1 = 4400.7 (3.136) are presented in Fig.135) For the ﬁrst three natural frequencies the corresponding natural modes Y1 (z) = sin 4400 z 5188.137) = = = 5123s−1 m lm 20 and the corresponding mode is a straight line.

ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 189 1 Y (z) 1 0.5 0 -0.4 z 0.2 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 1 -1 Figure 13 1 Y2 (z) 0.4 z 0.2 0.8 1 -1 Figure 14 1 Y3 (z) 0.5 0.4 z 0.8 1 -1 Figure 15 .5 0 -0.2 0.5 0.5 0 -0.

16 O z k l y Figure 16 .ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 190 Problem 43 Produce natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes for the ﬁxedelastically supported beam shown in Fig.

t)|z=0 = 0 ¯ ∂y(z. t) + λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 4 Its particular solution can be sought in the following form y(z.138) the above solution has to fulﬁll boundary conditions.140) (3. t)| V (z.143) z=l ¯ ¯ 2 ∂z ∂z ∂z z=l z=l Yn (z)|z=0 = 0 ¯ I Yn (z)¯z=0 = 0 ¯ II Yn (z)¯z=l = 0 Introduction of the solution 3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 191 Solution According to the equation 3.139 into the above boundary conditions yields ¯ III α Yn (z)¯z=l − Yn (z)|z=l = 0 (3. is shown in Fig. 17. t) ∂ 4 y(z. y(z.t)|z=l y dz z z Figure 17 conditions for the element dz which have to be fulﬁll for any instant of time.65. Equilibrium O M(z. Hence.144) . with the forces acting on it. t)|z=l = E(z)J(z) (3. At the left hand end the displacement and gradient of the beam have to be equal to zero. forms the boundary conditions associated with the right hand end ¯ ∂ 2 y(z.141) The right hand end. t) = Yn (z) sin ω n t (3.139) (3. t) ¯ = ky(z. t) ¯ ¯ =0 M(z.t)| z=l k l k y(z. t) ¯ ¯ = 0 ∂z ¯z=0 (3.t)| z=l V(z. t) ¯ ¯ = ∂ EJ ∂ y(z. t)|z=l = (3.142) ∂z 2 ¯z=l ¯ ¯ 2 ¯ ∂M(z. the equation of motion of the beam is ∂ 2 y(z.

β4 = n Bn + Dn = 0 An + Cn = 0 2 2 2 An β n sinh β n l + Bn β n cosh β n l − Cn β n sin β n l − Dn β 2 cos β n l = 0 n An β 3 α cosh β n l + Bn β 3 α sinh β n l − Cn β 3 α cos β n l + Dn β 3 α sin β n l n n n n −(An sinh β n l + Bn cosh β n l + Cn sin β n l + Dn cos β n l) = 0 (3.69) ω2 Aρ 2 n (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 192 EJ (3.150) sinh β n l cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ¯ ¯ 3 3 3 3 ¯ β α cosh β l β n α sinh β n l −β n α cos β n l β n α sin β n l ¯ n n ¯ ¯ ¯ − sinh β l ¯ − cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l n . 3. Cn and Dn .146) I Yn (z) = An β n cosh β n z + Bn β n sinh β n z + Cn β n cos β n z − Dn β n sin β n z where where (see Eq.147) ω 2 = EJ n λ Introduction of the above expressions into the boundary conditions 3. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 1 0 1 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 1 0 1 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ = 0 (3. Bn .76 to 3.79 the expressions for the natural modes Yn (z) and their derivatives are α= Yn (z) = An sinh β n z + Bn cosh β n z + Cn sin β n z + Dn cos β n z II Yn (z) = An β 2 sinh β n z + Bn β 2 cosh β n z − Cn β 2 sin β n z − Dn β 2 cos β n z n n n n III Yn (z) = An β 3 cosh β n z + Bn β 3 sinh β n z − Cn β 3 cos β n z + Dn β 3 sin β n z n n n n (3.149) ⎤ 0 0 ⎥ ⎥ 0 ⎦ 0 The non-zero solution of this set of equations exists if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero.144 results in the following set of algebraic equations that is linear with respect to the constants An .148) The matrix form of these equations is presented below ⎡ 0 1 0 1 ⎢ 1 0 1 0 ⎢ ⎢ sinh β n l cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ⎢ ⎣ β 3 α cosh β n l β 3 α sinh β n l −β 3 α cos β n l β 3 α sin β n l n n n n − sinh β n l − cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎥ An ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ Bn ⎥ ⎥⎢ ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ ⎣ Cn ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ Dn (3.145) k According to the equations 3.

0525β 3 sin β n n − cos β n ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ = 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ (3.152) .5×10−9 α = EJ = 2.03 × 0.0525β n sinh β n −.884m−1 β 3 = 7.18 200 100 0 2 4 6 8 β n -100 -200 Figure 18 From this diagram the ﬁrst three roots are β 1 = 2.0525β 3 cos β n n n n ¯ ¯ − sinh β n − cosh β n − sin β n 1 0 − cos β n .01 = 0.151) Solution of this equation for its roots β n is presented in Fig.942m−1 β 2 = 4.1 × 1011 N/m2 ρ = 7800kg/m3 A = 0.1×10 10000 = 0.888m−1 The relationship 3.01 = 2.5 × 10−9 m4 12 k = 10000N/m l = 1m 11 ×2.03×0.147 β4 = n Aρ 2 ω EJ n (3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 193 For the following data E = 2.0525 k the characteristic equation takes form ¯ ¯ 0 1 0 ¯ ¯ 1 0 1 ¯ ¯ sinh β n cosh β n − sin β n ¯ 3 ¯ .0003m2 3 J = 0.0525β 3 cosh β .

149 becomes linearly dependant. we are getting the corresponding natural modes Y1 (z) = . ⎣ B3 ⎦ = ⎣ −1.942z − .155) (3. The three remaining equations allow the constants An .0s−1 ω2 = Aρ (3.g.02 sinh 4.888z (3.0 (3.888z − 1.0 sin 7.883 1.942z Y2 (z) = 1.884z Y3 (z) = 1.884z − 1.0 A2 A3 ⎣ B1 ⎦ = ⎣ −1. 19 .884z + 1 cos 4.942z + 1 cos 2.156) For the ﬁrst three roots the numerical values of these constants are ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ A1 . Bn . Hence one of the unknown constants can be chosen arbitrarily (e.0 ⎦ C1 C2 C3 −.942z − 1. ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ An ⎡ 0 1 0 1 0 ⎥ ⎢ ⎦ ⎢ Bn ⎥ = ⎣ 0 ⎦ ⎣ 1 0 1 0 (3.0 ⎦ .0 cosh 4.6s−1 Aρ s β 4 EJ 2 = 357.153) For each of these roots the set of equations 3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 194 oﬀers values for the wanted natural frequencies s β 4 EJ 1 ω1 = = 129.888z + 1 cos 7. ⎣ B2 ⎦ = ⎣ −1.884z − 1.02 1.154) ⎣ Cn ⎦ 0 sinh β n l cosh β n l − sin β n l − cos β n l 1 ⎡ ⎤⎡ 0 1 0 ⎣ ⎦⎣ 1 0 1 sinh β n l cosh β n l − sin β n l ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ 0 1 An ⎣ Bn ⎦ = − ⎣ 1 0 Cn sinh β n l cosh β n l ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ An 1 ⎦=⎣ Bn ⎦ + ⎣ 0 − cos β n l Cn ⎤−1 ⎡ 0 1 ⎦ ⎣ 1 0 − cos β n l − sin β n l ⎤ 0 0 ⎦ 0 ⎤ ⎦ (3.158) The graphical interpretation of these natural modes is given in Fig.0 sinh 7.0 ⎦ .883 sin 2. Dn = 1) and the last equation can be crossed out.146 and remembering that Dn = 1.3s−1 ω2 = Aρ s β 4 EJ 3 = 932.883 −1.157) Introducing them into the ﬁrst function of 3.883 sinh 2.0 cosh 7.02 sin 4.888z − 1.0 cosh 2.02 −1. and Cn to be computed.

8 1 0 -1 -2 Figure 19 .2 Y2 (z) Y3 (z) 0.4 z 0.6 0.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 195 2 1 Y1 (z) 0.

Answer: GJo ωn 2 kL2 λ cot ωn l + 1 = 0 where λ2 = G λ ρ . Its right hand end is supported by means of the massless and rigid beam 2 of length L that is connected to two springs each of the stiﬀness k. Jo 1 2 2 z k l L k Figure 20 The left hand end of the shaft 1 shown in Fig. 20 is ﬁxed. G. Produce the equation for the natural frequencies of the shaft.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 196 Problem 44 ρ .

Answer: ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ βn αn ¯ ¯ ¯ β n cos β n l − αn sin β n l −β n sin β n l − αn cos β n l ¯ = 0 p Iω2 where β n = ω n G αn = GJn o . Jo 1 z l Figure 21 Two rigid discs 2 (see Fig.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 197 Problem 45 2 2 ρ . 21) are joined together by means of the shaft 1 of the length l. Produce the equation for the natural frequencies of the assembly. G. The moment of inertia of each disc about the axis z is I.

162) The right hand end The displacement and the bending moment has to be equal to zero. t)|z=l = 0 M(z. t)|z=0 = 0 ¯ ∂y(z.163) =0 z=l (3.65. t) ¯ ¯ = E(z)J(z) ∂z 2 ¯ 2 (3. t)|z=l ¯ ∂ y(z.165) . t) ¯ ¯ = 0 ∂z ¯z=0 (3. At the left hand end the displacement and gradient of the beam have to be equal to zero. t) = Yn (z) sin ω n t (3. E. Hence. 22.164) Introduction of the solution 3.159) the above solution has to fulﬁll boundary conditions. the equation of motion of the beam is (3. Hence. J.160) Solution According to the equation 3. y(z.161) (3. t) + λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 4 Its particular solution can be sought in the following form y(z. ρ z l y Figure 22 The uniform beam is supported as shown in Fig.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 198 Problem 46 l. t) ∂ 4 y(z. y(z. Produce the equations for the natural frequencies of this beam Answer: p λ = EJ sinh β n l cos β n l − sin β n l cosh β n l = 0 β n = ωn λ Aρ ∂ 2 y(z. A.160 into the above boundary conditions yields Yn (z)|z=0 ¯ I Yn (z)¯z=0 Yn (z)|z=l ¯ II Yn (z)¯z=l = = = = 0 0 0 0 (3.

3.168) ⎡ ⎤ 0 An ⎢ 0 ⎥ Bn ⎥ = ⎢ ⎣ 0 Cn ⎦ 0 Dn ⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ (3. Cn and Dn .171) A development of the above determinant results in the following equation for the unknown parameter β n l .165 results in the following set of algebraic equations that is linear with respect to the constants An .69) ω2 Aρ 2 ω = n = (3. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 1 0 1 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 1 0 1 0 ¯ ¯=0 (3.79 the expressions for the natural modes Yn (z) and their derivatives are Yn (z) = An sinh β n z + Bn cosh β n z + Cn sin β n z + Dn cos β n z I Yn (z) = An β n cosh β n z + Bn β n sinh β n z + Cn β n cos β n z − Dn β n sin β n z II Yn (z) = An β 2 sinh β n z + Bn β 2 cosh β n z − Cn β 2 sin β n z − Dn β 2 cos β n z n n n n III Yn (z) = An β 3 cosh β n z + Bn β 3 sinh β n z − Cn β 3 cos β n z + Dn β 3 sin β n z n n n n (3.166) where (see Eq.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 199 According to the equations 3.76 to 3.170) ¯ sinh β n l cosh β n l sin β n l cos β n l ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ sinh β l cosh β l − sin β l − cos β l ¯ n n n n β n l sinh β n l cos β n l − sin β n l cosh β n l = 0 where: (3.169) The non-zero solution of this set of equations exists if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero. β4 n Bn + Dn An + Cn An sinh β n l + Bn cosh β n l + Cn sin β n l + Dn cos β n l 2 An β n sinh β n l + Bn β 2 cosh β n l − Cn β 2 sin β n l − Dn β 2 cos β n l n n n The matrix form of these equations is presented below ⎡ ⎤⎡ 0 1 0 1 ⎢ ⎥⎢ 1 0 1 0 ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎣ sinh β n l cosh β n l sin β n l cos β n l ⎦ ⎣ sinh β n l cosh β n l -sin β n l -cos β n l = = = = 0 0 0 0 (3.167) 2 EJ n λ Introduction of the above expressions into the boundary conditions 3. Bn .

ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 200 βn = The roots β n l of the equation 3.172) .173) r ωn λ λ= EJ Aρ (3.171 allows the natural frequences to be produced ωn = λβ 2 = λ n (β n l)2 EJ = (β l)2 l2 Aρl2 n (3.

A. A l 2 k z Figure 23 The uniform rod 1 shown in Fig. J. E. 23 is supported by means of the massless spring of stiﬀness k. ρ z l y Figure 24 . Produce the equation for the natural frequencies.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 201 Problem 47 1 ρ . Problem 48 l. E.

24. the equations for the natural frequencies of this beam Answer: cosβl = 0 q EJ where β = 4 Aρω2 . Produce: 1. the boundary conditions for the equation (1) Answer: for z = 0 (1) Y = 0 (2) Y 00 = 0 0 for z = l (3) Y = 0 (4) Y 000 = 0 2.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 202 The uniform beam is supported as shown in Fig.

Produce the equation for the natural frequencies of the assembly described. Their right hand ends are welded to the plate 3. β 1 = λ2 G ρ JO1 ρ1 Iz . t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = G . The dynamic properties of the shafts are deﬁned by their density ρ1 and ρ2 . G1. G2. JO1 l ρ2 .shear modulus ρ — density Answer: ωn β 1 cot λ1 l+β 2 cot ωn l = 1. This assembly performs the torsional vibration about axis z. ρ1 λ2 = q G2 ρ2 . ∂ 2 ϕ(z. where. JO2 Figure 25 The left hand ends of the two shafts (1 and 2) depicted in the Fig.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 203 Problem 49 1 2 3 z ρ1 . their shear modulus G 1 and G 2 and the second polar moment of area J O1 and J O2 respectively. The moment of inertia of the plate about the axis z is I z . The diﬀerential equation of motion of a shaft is. 25 are welded to a motionless wall. t) ∂ 2 ϕ(z. β2 = JO2 ρ2 Iz . λ1 = q G1 .

Produce the equation for the natural frequencies of the system described. This element can be treated as a particle of mass m. density ρ and area of its cross-section A is under the constant tension T.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 204 Problem 50 m z 1 a l y T 2 Figure 26 The string 1 shown in Fig. At the position deﬁned by the distance a the element 2 is attached. .26 of length l.

181) where ω n stands for the natural frequency that is common for both parts of the string.175) (3.180) (3.t) y2(z. t) = Y2n (z) sin ω n t (3.176) (3. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = Similarly. t ) |z = a ∂z y1(z. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where T Aρ Solutions of the above equations are of the following form λ2 = y1n (z.179) (3. t) = Y1n (z) sin ω n t y2n (z. .174) (3.t)|z=a T T a l T ∂y1 ( z.178) (3.t) y1(z. t ) | z =a ∂z z y Figure 27 Let the diﬀerential equation of motion of the uniform string in the region 0<z<a be ∂ 2 y1 (z. in the region a<z<l the equation of motion is ∂ 2 y2 (z.177) T Aρ (3. t) ∂ 2 y2 (z.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 205 Solution ∂y2 ( z. t) ∂ 2 y1 (z.t)|z=a=y2(z.

186) (3.196) ¯ 0 ¯ + T Y2n (z)¯ z=a .ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 206 These solutions must fulﬁl boundary conditions (z = 0.187) (3. t) |z=a ¯ ∂ 2 y1 (z. t) ¯ ∂y2 (z. t) |z=0 y1n (z.188) (3.191) (3.190) z=a Introduction of the solutions 3.189) (3.181 into the equations 3.180 and 3. z = l) and compatibility conditions at z = a.190 into the conditions above one can get the following set of homogeneous linear equations (0) S1n + (1) C1n + (0) S2n + (0) C2n = 0 (sin β n a) S1n + (cos β n a) C1n − (sin β n a) S2n − (cos β n a) C2n = 0 (−mω 2 sin β n a + T β n cos β n a) S1n + (−mω2 sin β n a − T β n sin β n a) C1n + n n − (T β n cos β n a) S2n + (T β n sin β n a) C2n = 0 (0) S1n + (0) C1n + (sin β n l) S2n + (cos β n l) C2n = 0 (3. t) ¯ ¯ ¯ = −T +T ∂z ¯z=a ∂z ¯z=a = 0 (3.182) (3.185) Introduction of the solutions 3.175 and 3.184) (3.189 and 3.193) (3.183) (3. t) ¯ ¯ m ∂t2 ¯z=a y2n (z.195) This set of equations possesses non-trivial solutions if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero. t) |z=l = 0 = y2n (z. They are y1n (z.194) 00 (3.180 into the conditions 3.181 yields Y1n (z) |z=0 = 0 Y1n (z) |z=a = Y2n (z) |z=a ¯ ¯ 0 ¯ −mω 2 Y1n (z)¯z=a = −T Y1n (z)¯ n Y2n (z) |z=l = 0 (3.178 results in the following set of diﬀerential equations Y1n (z) + β 2 Y1n (z) = 0 n 00 Y2n (z) + β 2 Y2n (z) = 0 n where ω2 Aρω 2 n n = 2 T λ The general solution of these equations can be predicted as follows β2 = n Y1n (z) = S1n sin β n z + C1n cos β n z Y2n (z) = S2n sin β n z + C2n cos β n z Introduction of the solutions 3. t) |z=a ¯ ¯ ∂y1 (z. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 1 0 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ sin β n a cos β n a − sin β n a − cos β n a ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ −mω2 sin β n a + ¯=0 −mω 2 sin β n a + n n ¯ −T β n cos β n a T β n sin β n a ¯ ¯ ¯ +T β n cos β n a −T β n sin β n a ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 0 sin β n l cos β n l ¯ (3.192) (3.

188 allow the natural frequencies to be produced s T ωn = β n Aρ . with help of the relationship 3.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 207 Roots β n of the above equation.

Their dynamic properties are determined by the density and the area of their cross-section A.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 208 Problem 51 ρ1. Produce the natural frequencies of the system described and the corresponding natural modes . A2 1 l1 y 2 l2 T z Figure 28 Two strings of length l1 and l2 are loaded with tension T . A1 ρ2.

200) (3. t) |z=l1 +l2 ¯ ¯ ∂ 2 y1 (z.198) where λ2 = 1 Similarly. t) ¯ ¯ − ∂z ¯z=l1 (3. t) ¯ ¯ ¯ dm = −T ∂t2 ¯ ∂z ¯ z=l1 z=l1 y2n (z.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 209 Solution Let the diﬀerential equation of motion of the uniform string in the region 0 < z < l1 be ∂ 2 y1 (z. the above conditions can rewritten as follows y1n (z. t) |z=l1 +l2 = 0 ¯ ∂y2 (z. in the region l1 < z < l1 + l2 the equation of motion is ∂ 2 y2 (z.204) The third condition we are getting by application of the Newton law to the element of the string associated with z = l1 . t) ∂ 2 y2 (z. t) ¯ ∂y1 (z. t) |z=0 = 0 y1n (z. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 where λ2 = 2 T A2 ρ2 (3.197) (3. t) ¯ ¯ + = 0 ∂z ¯ z=l1 ¯ ∂y1 (z. z = l1 + l2 ) and compatibility conditions at z = l1 . t) |z=l1 +l2 ¯ ∂y2 (z. t) − λ2 =0 ∂t2 ∂z 2 T A1 ρ1 (3. t) |z=l1 +l2 = 0 .203) These solutions must fulﬁl boundary conditions (z = 0. Since dm stands for an inﬁnitesimal mass of this element. t) |z=l1 = y2n (z. t) ∂ 2 y1 (z.205) y2n (z. t) ¯ ¯ +T ∂z ¯z=l1 (3. t) |z=l1 = y2n (z.199) Solutions of the above equations are of the following form y1n (z. t) = Y1n (z) sin ω n t y2n (z.202) (3. t) = Y2n (z) sin ω n t (3. t) |z=0 = 0 y1n (z.201) (3. They are y1n (z.

214) .198 and 3.203 into the equations 3. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯=0 ¯ ¯ ¯ (3.209 and 3.201 results in the following set of diﬀerential equations Y1n (z) + β 2 Y1n (z) = 0 n1 00 Y2n (z) + β 2 Y2n (z) = 0 n2 where β2 = 1n ω2 A1 ρ1 ω 2 n n . The solution is presented for the following set of numerical data.212) This set of equations possesses non-trivial solutions if and only if its characteristic determinant is equal to zero.210) ¯ ¯ −Y1n (z)¯ 0 z=l1 (3.208) The general solution of these equations can be predicted as follows Y1n (z) = S1n sin β 1n z + C1n cos β 1n z Y2n (z) = S2n sin β 2n z + C2n cos β 2n z Introduction of the solutions 3.206) (3. ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 1 0 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ sin β 1n l1 cos β 1n l1 − sin β 2n l1 − cos β 2n l1 ¯ ¯ ¯ (3.209) (3.211) Y2n (z) |z=l1 +l2 = 0 Introduction of the solutions 3.203 into the conditions 3.213) ¯ β 1n cos β 1n l1 −β 1n sin β 1n l1 −β 2n cos β 2n l1 +β 2n sin β 2n l1 ¯ = 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 0 sin β 2n (l1 + l2 ) cos β 2n (l1 + l2 ) ¯ Introducing 3. = 2 T λ1 β2 = 2n ω2 A2 ρ2 ω 2 n n = 2 T λ2 00 (3.208 into the above equation we haveβ 1n = ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 1 sin ωn l1 cos ωn l1 λ1 λ1 ωn cos ωn l1 − ωn sin ωn l1 λ1 λ1 λ1 λ1 0 0 ωn λ2 0 0 ωn − sin λ2 l1 − cos ωn l1 λ2 − ωn cos ωn l1 + ωn sin ωn l1 λ2 λ2 λ2 λ2 sin ωn (l1 + l2 ) cos ωn (l1 + l2 ) λ2 λ2 Now. the equation can be solved for the natural frequencies of the string.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 210 Introduction of the solutions 3.210 into the conditions above one can get the following set of homogeneous linear equations (0) S1n + (1) C1n + (0) S2n + (0) C2n = 0 (sin β 1n l1 ) S1n + (cos β 1n l1 ) C1n − (sin β 2n l1 ) S2n − (cos β 2n l1 ) C2n = 0 (β 1n cos β 1n l1 ) S1n − (β 1n sin β 1n l1 ) C1n − (β 2n cos β 2n l1 ) S2n + (β 2n sin β 2n l1 ) C2n = 0 (0) S1n + (0) C1n + (sin β 2n (l1 + l2 )) S2n + (cos β 2n (l1 + l2 )) C2n = 0 (3.207) (3.205 yields Y1n (z) |z=0 = 0 Y1n (z) |z=l1 = Y2n (z) |z=l1 ¯ 0 ¯ + Y2n (z)¯ = 0 z=l1 (3.

5 . S2n .5 + 1. They are ω 1 = 483. A2 = 1 · 10−6 m2 .217) . 1 = 2 = 7800kg/m3 .5 ¡ .)ω n cos 253 (.5 ¡ .5 + 1. A1 = 2 · 10−6 m2 .18m/s −6 2·10−6 7800 1 2 ¯ ¯ 0 0 ¯ ¢ ¢ ¡ . λ2 = A2 ρ = 1·105007800 = 253.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 211 l1 = .5 ¢ ¡ .5 ¡ . ω3 = 1437. ω5 = 2344[rad/s] (3.5m.212. From the ﬁrst equation one can see that the constant C1n must be equal to zero C1n = 0 (sin β 1n l1 ) S1n − (sin β 2n l1 ) S2n − (cos β 2n l1 ) C2n = 0 (β 1n cos β 1n l1 ) S1n − (β 2n cos β 2n l1 ) S2n + (β 2n sin β 2n l1 ) C2n = 0 (0) S1n + (sin β 2n (l1 + l2 )) S2n + (cos β 2n (l1 + l2 )) C2n = 0 (3. C1n .5 ¢ .5 1 1 cos 179 ωn − 179 sin 179 ω n −¡ 1 cos 253 ωn ¢ +¡1 sin 253 ωn ¢ ¯ 179 253 253 ¯ 1 1 0 0 sin 253. (. ω2 = 920.5 sin 179 ω n ¢ cos 179 ω n ¢ − sin 253 ω n ¢ − cos 253 ω n ¢ ¯ ¯=0 ¡ . C2n can be computed from the homogeneous set of linear equations 3.)ω n ¯ (3. T = 500N.03m/s.m. 29 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¡0 ¡1 10 5 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 frequency [rad/s] -5 -10 Figure 29 It allows the natural frequencies to be determined. l2 = 1. ω 4 = 1861.216) The so far unknown constants S1n . q q q q T 500 T λ1 = A1 ρ = 179.215) The magnitude of the determinant as a function of the frequency ω n is presented in Fig.

675·1. 30 .899 sin 3.5−(sin 3.5 ω3 1437 = 253.5) β 23 = A plot of the natural modes is shown in Fig.5) − cos β 21 (l1 +l2 ) − cos 1.63·0.5) cos 3.5 n=3 ω3 = 1437.5) cos 1.67 λ2 5.63·0.48 sin 2.63·1.5 sin 1.675·1.ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 212 Since the equations is linearly dependent for roots of its characteristic determinant.63·1.5 S23 = sin β (l1 +l2 ) = sin 5.63 λ1 λ cos β (l +l ) cos β 22 l1 −(sin β 22 l1 ) sin β 22(l 1+l 2) cos 3.5) − cos β 22 (l1 +l2 ) − cos 3. Hence let us crossed out the second equation and assume C2n = 1. β 12 = ω2 920 920 2 = 179.907·0.03 = λ1 cos β 23 (l1 +l2 ) cos β 23 l1 −(sin β 23 l1 ) sin β (l +l ) 8. one of them must be crossed out and one of the constant can be assumed arbitrarily.5 S22 = sin β (l1 +l2 ) = sin 3.944 S13 = (sin β 13 l1 ) − cos β 23 (l1 +l2 ) − cos 5.5 cos 5.5 < z < 1.026z for 0 < z < 0. β 13 = ω3 1437 = 179.907·1.15 S12 = (sin β 12 l1 ) (sin 5.773 23 Y13 (z) = S13 sin β 13 z = 0.15 sin 5.675·0.5 Y23 (z) = S23 sin β 23 z + 1 cos β 23 z = 0.63·1.5 < z < 1.5 Y12 (z) = S12 sin β 12 z = 1.675·1.18 = 1.907·1.697z Y21 (z) = S21 sin β 21 z + 1 cos β 21 z = 3.026·0.5 = 3.5 = 0.13 β 22 = ω2 = 253.63z + 1 cos 3. 3 the constants S1n and S2n are n=1 ω 1 = 483.91z + 1 cos 1.46Y11 (z) 21 for 0 < z < 0.899 22 for 0 < z < 0.5−(sin 1.63·1.18 = 5.5 n=2 ω2 = 920.773 sin 5. C2n = 1 The set of equations for determination of the remaining constants S1n and S2n is (sin β 1n l1 ) S1n − (sin β 2n l1 ) S2n = cos β 2n l1 (0) S1n + (sin β 2n (l1 + l2 )) S2n = − cos β 2n (l1 + l2 ) Hence S2n = S1n = − cos β 2n (l1 + l2 ) sin β 2n (l1 + l2 ) β (l1 +l2 ) cos β 2n l1 − (sin β 2n l1 ) cos β 2n(l1 +l2 ) sin 2n (sin β 1n l1 ) For n = 1.5 sin 3.63z f or0.5 < z < 1.18 = 3.5 sin = (sin 8.67z + 1 cos 5.46 sin 1.5 22 1 2 = = 1.5 = 0.907·1.5−(sin 5.907·0.026 23 1 2 = 0.03 = 5.697·0. 2.67z f or 0.03 = 2.5 S21 = sin β (l1 +l2 ) = sin 1.944 sin 8.48 S11 = (sin β 11 l1 ) (sin 2.675·0.907·1.13z Y22 (z) = S22 sin β 22 z + 1 cos β 22 z = 0.5 Y11 (z) = S11 sin β 11 z = 3.675·1.5 21 1 2 = = 3.91z for 0.697 β 21 = ω2 = 253.13·0.5) cos 5. β 11 = ω1 483 483 1 = 179.91 λ1 λ cos β (l +l ) cos β 21 l1 −(sin β 21 l1 ) sin β 21(l 1+l 2) cos 1.

5 1 1 .ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 213 n a tu ra l m o d e s 4 3 2 1 0 0 -1 0 .5 -2 z [m ] Figure 30 .

......b).. the beam is divided into a suﬃcient..DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 214 3.. for necessary accuracy.. n ..... 33a) and its model (Fig... These distinguished points n are called nodes.... 32.........3 DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS The commercially available computer packages allow to produce stiﬀness and inertia matrix of free in space beam along coordinates yn and ϕyn (see Fig.. the actual element (Fig. Inertia and stiﬀness matrix for the free-free beam According to the Rigid Element Method.. 3... 32c).. Since: δ ri = the bending stiﬀness is kMi = EJi li (3..220) ... form a section (Fig... 33b) requires equal angular deﬂection ( δri = δ ei ) caused by the same bending moment Mi ..218) Similarly.. In this kTi = Ti li GAi and yei = Ti kTi (3.. N yn ϕy n Figure 31 are called Rigid Element Method and Finite Element Method... 33c and Fig..........1 Rigid Elements Method...... Each section is considered rigid and its inertia properties are represented by mass mi and moments of inertia Ii . the equivalence of shearing deﬂections (yri = yei ) caused by the same shearing force Ti (Fig. 32a))The bending and shearing properties of each segment are represented by two springs of stiﬀness kMi and kTi respectively (Fig.. 33d) yri = li γ ri = yields GAi (3. number of segments I of constant cross-section (Fig ..221) li The right hand part of the segment li−1 and the left hand part of the subsequent segment li ..3..... 31) associated with an arbitrary chosen number N of points..The most popular approaches for creation of the stiﬀness and inertia matrices 1 2 ....219) Mi li 2EJi and δ ei = Mi 2kMi (3. Equivalence of both...

li l i+1 .DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 215 l i-1 ....Ji li Mi Mi li G. a) li kT i k Mi l i-1 /2 Gi l i/ 2 mi Ii mi Ii k Mi zli z ri z l i+1 m i+1 I i +1 k Mi+1 z ri+1 b) c) k T i -1 .. k T i+1 ...Ai Ti y ri Ti Ti ye i a) c) δri δe i 2δe i k Mi Mi Mi b) Ti kT i d) Figure 33 .. k Mi-1 z d) y Figure 32 E..........

. . ˙ 0 Ki. ˙˙ . ˙ 0 0 0 .1 . . ˙ 0 . . ˙˙ . . ˙ Ki−1..DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 216 way a complete symmetry is obtained that gives simple programming for computer analysis. 32d) results in the following equations of motion. ... Application of the Lagrange’s equations to the physical model is shown in Fig. . .224) (3. 0 ..i = 0 Ii 0 ..228) ¸ (3. ˙ 0 Mi. ˙ 0 0 Mi+1. ˙˙ .N 0 ..i 0 . ˙ 0 K1...1 .. . ˙ Ki−1.. +kTi−1 zli + kTi zri 2 +kMi−1 + kTi−1 zl2i + kTi zri ¸ +kTi zli+1 −kMi + kTi zli+1 zri ¸ ∙ yi yi = ϕyi .i Ki+1.i−1 0 ..231 is given in Fig. ˙ MN....i−1 Ki...i+1 = −kTi zri ∙ −kTi−1 −kTi−1 zri−1 +kTi−1 zli −kMi−1 + kTi−1 zri−1 zli N =I +1 ¸ ∙ mi 0 Mi. .227) ¸ (3. ˙ 0 0 .i−1 0 0 ..N ⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ (3.222) ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ m=⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ k=⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ Ki. ˙ 0 0 0 . ˙ 0 0 . ..i Ki.. ˙˙ .. . .225) (3.223) (3.. .. . ˙ 0 0 0 . .i = +kTi−1 zli + kTi zri ∙ −kTi Ki.i+1 . ˙ 0 ⎡ y1 ⎢ : ⎢ ⎢ yi−1 ⎢ yb = ⎢ yi ⎢ ⎢ yi+1 ⎢ ⎣ : yN ⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ (3. 34. ˙˙ .229) (3.i+1 . m¨ + ky = 0 y where: ⎡ M1.230) (3.i−1 = ∙ +kTi−1 + kTi Ki. . .226) (3... ˙ KN. ˙˙ . . ϕyi are associated with nodes which are located at the centre of gravity of the rigid elements.The coordinates yi .231) The geometrical interpretation of the vector of coordinates 3. 0 .. ˙ 0 0 . ˙˙ . ˙ 0 0 . ˙ 0 0 0 . ˙˙ . ˙ 0 ⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ .i .i+1 Ki+1... ˙ Mi−1.

In a general case these forces can be independent of time (static forces) or they can depend on time (excitation forces). (3.232) . The i − th element is shown in Fig. the shaft is divided into a number of the uniform and ﬂexible elements.g. ϕyi should be added to the mathematical model 3.232. Inertia and stiﬀness matrix for the free-free beam According to the Finite Elements Method.DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 217 element 1 Oi node 1 element i element N z node i yi ϕ yi node N y Figure 34 Introduction of the external forces If there is a set of forces acting on the rigid element.2 Finite Elements Method. the equation of motion of the free-free beam takes the following form. Introducing notations Fs for the static forces and F(t) for the excitation forces. m¨ + ky = Fs + F(t) y 3.3. 36. 35This equivalent set of forces along the nodal coordinates Fi Mi element i z node i yi ϕ yi Oi ai Fi y Figure 35 yi . each of them (e. Fi ) can be equivalently replaced by the force Fi applied to the node Oi and the moment Mi = ai · Fi as shown in Fig.

236) ⎦ ⎣ C3 ⎦ ⎣ yi2 ⎦ ⎣ li l li 1 6 2 i 1 2 l li 1 0 C4 ϕyi2 2 i Its solution yields the integration constants Cj . The nodes are denoted by numbers 1 and 2. 3. ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤⎡ ⎡ yi1 C1 0 0 0 1 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎥⎢ ⎢ 0 ⎢ 1 3 102 1 0 ⎥ ⎢ C2 ⎥ = ⎢ ϕyi1 ⎥ (3. Ai .DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 218 1 z yi1 E i Ji Ai ρi yi2 ϕyi1 li y 2 ϕyi2 Figure 36 In this ﬁgure Ei . 2. 4) must be chosen to fulﬁll the following boundary conditions ¯ ¯ dy(z) ¯ dy(z) ¯ ¯ ¯ = ϕyi1 y(z)|z=li = yi2 . Introduction of solution 3. The diﬀerential equation of the statically deﬂected line of the element in the plane yz is d4 y(z) Ei Ji =0 (3.233) dz 4 Integration of the above equation four times yields 1 1 y(z) = C1 z 3 + C2 z 2 + C3 z + C4 6 2 (3. dz ¯z=0 dz ¯z=li The parameters yi1 and yi2 are called nodal displacements and the parameters ϕi1 and ϕi2 are called nodal rotations.237) 6 3 (2yi1 li . area of cross-section and the unit mass of the element.234) The constants of integration Cj (j = 1. ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤−1 ⎡ ⎡ 0 0 0 1 yi1 C1 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ C2 ⎥ ⎢ 0 ⎥ = ⎢ 1 3 102 1 0 ⎥ ⎢ ϕyi1 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ C3 ⎦ ⎣ li l li 1 ⎦ ⎣ yi2 ⎦ ⎣ 6 2 i 1 2 C4 l li 1 0 ϕyi2 2 i ⎤ + li ϕyi1 − 2yi2 + li ϕyi2 ) ⎥ 2 2 (−3yi1 − 2li ϕyi1 + 3yi2 − li ϕyi2 ) ⎥ li ⎥ ⎦ ϕyi1 yi1 (3.235) y(z)|z=0 = yi1 . Ji . = ϕyi2 (3.234 into the above boundary conditions results in the following set of algebraic equations linear with respect to the constants Cj . second moment of area about the neutral axis. and ρi stand for Young modulus.

239) (3. The matrix {y} contains the nodal coordinates. As it can be seen from Eq. If the ﬁnite element performs motion with respect to the stationary system of coordinates xyz. t) ∂ 2 y(z.242) (3. It should be noted that this assumption is acceptable only if the considered element is reasonably short. These two matrices are going to be developed from the two following criterions: .241) As one can see from the equation 3.237 into the equation of the deﬂected line 3.234 one may get it in the following form. 3.238) ⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭ where: ⎧ ³ ´2 ³ ´3 ⎪ 1 − 3 lz + 2 lz ⎪ i ⎪ ⎧ ⎫ ⎪ ∙³ ´ ⎪ ³ ´2 ³ i ´3 ¸ ⎪ ⎪ H1 ⎪ ⎪ z ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ li − 2 lz + lz ⎨ ⎬ ⎨ li i i H2 li ³ ´2 ³ ´3 = {H(z)} = ⎪ H3 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 3 lz − 2 lz ⎩ ⎭ ⎪ ⎪ i ∙ ³i´ H4 li ⎪ ³ ´3 ¸ ⎪ 2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ − lz + lz li i i ⎧ ⎫ ⎪ yi1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎬ ϕyi1 {y} = ⎪ yi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎭ ϕyi2 (3.239) are known as Hermite cubics or shape functions. " "µ ¶ µ ¶2 µ ¶2 µ ¶3 # µ ¶3 # z z z z z y(z) = 1 − 3 yi1 + li ϕyi1 −2 +2 + li li li li li " µ ¶ " µ ¶ µ ¶3 # µ ¶3 # 2 2 z z z z yi2 + − li ϕyi2 + 3 −2 + li li li li = {H(z)}T {y} (3.240) Functions H1 .DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 219 After introduction of Eq. the dynamic deﬂection line is approximated by the static deﬂection line. t) = {H(z)}T {y (t)} (3.243) In the above equations ρi stands for the unit mass of the ﬁnite element and [mi ] and [ki ] stands for the inertia and stiﬀness matrix respectively. t) − ρi =0 ∂z 4 ∂t2 by its discreet representation along the nodal coordinates Ei Ji y [mi ] {¨ (t)} + [ki ] {y (t)} = 0. The following mathematical manipulations are aimed to replace the continues mathematical model of the element considered ∂ 4 y(z. it is assumed that the motion in the plane yz can be approximated by the following equation.241. (3. y(z. H2 . 3. H3 .238 the deﬂected line of the ﬁnite element is assembled of terms which are linear with respect to the nodal coordinates. H4 (see Eq. 3.

The kinetic energy of the continues physical model of the ﬁnite element is µ ¶2 Z 1 li ∂y(z. t) ρ = dz 2 0 i ∂t ∂t Z ´³ ´ 1 li ³ = ˙ ρi {y (t)}T {H(z)} {H(z)}T {y (t)} dz ˙ 2 0 ∙ Z li ¸ 1 T T = {y (t)} ρi ˙ {H(z)} {H(z)} dz {y (t)} ˙ 2 0 ⎛ ⎡ ⎤ ⎞ 2 H1 H1 H2 li H1 H3 H1 H4 li Z li 2 2 2 ⎜ ⎢ H2 H1 li 1 H2 li H2 H3 li H2 H4 li ⎥ ⎟ ⎢ ⎥ dz ⎟ {y (t)} ˙ = {y (t)}T ⎜ρi ˙ 2 ⎝ ⎣ H3 H1 H3 H2 li H3 H3 H4 li ⎦ ⎠ 2 0 2 2 2 H4 H11 li H4 H2 li H4 H3 li H4 li (3. The potential energy of the continues physical model of the ﬁnite element must be equal to the potential energy of its discreet physical model. The kinetic energy of the continues physical model of the ﬁnite element must be equal to the kinetic energy of its discreet physical model. t) 1 li ∂y(z.DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS 220 1. 2.245) In the last formula mi stands for mass of the ﬁnite element. To take advantage of the second criterion let us produce expression for the . t) T = ρ dz 2 0 i ∂t µ ¶µ ¶ Z ∂y(z. 3. ⎤ 2 H1 H1 H2 li H1 H3 H1 H4 li Z li 2 2 2 ⎢ H2 H1 li H2 li H2 H3 li H2 H4 li ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ dz = ρi 2 ⎣ H3 H1 H3 H2 li H3 H3 H4 li ⎦ 0 2 2 2 H4 H1 li H4 H2 li H4 H3 li H4 li ⎡ 13 ⎤ 9 13 11 l − 420 li 35 210 i 70 13 1 2 1 2 11 ⎢ l l l − 140 li ⎥ 105 i 420 i ⎥ = ρi li ⎢ 210 i 9 11 13 13 ⎣ li − 210 li ⎦ 70 420 35 13 1 2 11 1 2 − 420 li − 140 li − 210 li 105 li ⎡ 13 ⎤ 13 11 9 l − 420 li 35 210 i 70 13 1 2 1 2 ⎢ 11 l l l − 140 li ⎥ 105 i 420 i ⎥ = mi ⎢ 210 i 13 9 11 13 ⎣ l − 210 li ⎦ 70 420 i 35 13 1 2 11 1 2 − 420 li − 140 li − 210 li 105 li ⎡ mi (3.244 represents kinetic energy function of the discreet physical model along the nodal coordinates yi1 ϕyi1 yi2 ϕyi2 with the following matrix of inertia.244) It is easy to see that the last row of Eq.

DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS

221

potential energy function for the continues physical model of the ﬁnite element. µ 2 ¶2 Z 1 li ∂ y(z, t) V = Ei Ji dz 2 0 ∂z 2 µ 2 ¶µ 2 ¶ Z 1 li ∂ y(z, t) ∂ y(z, t) = dz Ei Ji 2 0 ∂z 2 ∂z 2 ! µ ½ 2 ¾¶ Ã½ 2 ¾T Z d H(z) d H(z) 1 li Ei Ji {y (t)}T {y (t)} dz = 2 0 dz 2 dz 2 " ¾½ 2 ¾T # Z li ½ 2 d H(z) d H(z) 1 {y (t)}T Ei Ji dz {y (t)} = 2 dz 2 dz 2 0 ⎛ ⎡ ¡ 00 ¢2 ⎤ ⎞ 00 00 00 00 00 00 H1 H1 H2 li H1 H3 H1 H4 li Z li ⎜ ⎢ H 00 H 00 li (H 00 )2 l2 H 00 H 00 li H 00 H 00 l2 ⎥ ⎟ 1 T ⎜ i 2 2 3 2 4 i ⎥ dz ⎟ {y (t)} ⎢ 200 100 = {y (t)} ⎝Ei Ji 00 00 00 00 00 ⎣ H H 2 H3 H2 li (H3 )2 H3 H4 li ⎦ ⎠ 0 3 1 00 00 00 00 2 00 00 00 2 H4 H1 li H4 H2 li H4 H3 li (H4 )2 li (3.246) As one can see from Eq. 3.246, to fulﬁll the second criterion, the stiﬀness matrix along the nodal coordinates yi1 ϕyi1 yi2 ϕyi2 must be as follows. ⎡ ¡ 00 ¢2 H1 Z li ⎢ H 00 H 00 li ⎢ 200 100 = Ei Ji ⎣ H H 0 3 1 00 00 H4 H1 li ⎡ 12 6li 2 Ei Ji ⎢ 6li 4li ⎢ = 3 ⎣ −12 −6l li i 2 6li 2li H1 H2 li H1 H3 00 00 00 2 (H2 )2 li H2 H3 li 00 00 00 H3 H2 li (H3 )2 00 00 2 00 00 H4 H2 li H4 H3 li ⎤ −12 6li 2 −6li 2li ⎥ ⎥ 12 −6li ⎦ 2 −6li 4li

00 00 00 00

ki

⎤ 00 00 H1 H4 li 00 00 2 H2 H4 li ⎥ ⎥ dz 00 00 H3 H4 li ⎦ 00 2 (H4 )2 li (3.247)

Hence, the mathematical model of the element considered can be written as mi yi + ki yi = Ryi ¨ (3.248)

The vector Ri represents the interaction forces between the neighborhood elements. Ryi = £ Ryi1 Rϕyi1 Ryi2 Rϕyi2 ¤T (3.249)

In exactly the same manner one can create mathematical model for the next to the right hand side element of the shaft, say element j. ¨ mj yj + kj yj = Ryj (3.250)

DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS

222

where: ⎢ mj = mj ⎢ ⎣ kj ⎡

13 35 11 l 210 j 9 70 13 − 420 lj 11 l 210 j 1 2 l 105 j 13 l 420 j 1 2 − 140 lj 9 70 13 l 420 j 13 35 11 − 210 lj

12 6lj −12 6lj 2 2 ⎢ 6lj Ej Aj ⎢ 4lj −6lj 2lj ⎥ ⎥ = 3 lj ⎣ −12 −6lj 12 −6lj ⎦ 2 2 6lj 2lj −6lj 4lj £ ¤T yj = yj1 ϕyj1 yj2 ϕyj2 £ ¤T Ryi = Ryj1 Rϕyj1 Ryj2 Rϕyj2

⎡

⎤ 13 − 420 lj 1 2 − 140 lj ⎥ ⎥ 11 − 210 lj ⎦ 1 2 l 105 j ⎤

(3.251)

(3.252) (3.253)

These two equations of motion (3.248 3.250), associated with the two elements i and j, haveto fulﬁll the compatibility (continuity and equilibrium) conditions. These conditions allow to join those two elements to create one mathematical model representing both elements. In the case considered here, the compatibility conditions between the two elements i and j correspond to the left hand side node of the element i and the right hand side node of the element j. For these nodes the continuity conditions take form ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ yi2 yj1 yij = = (3.254) ϕyi2 ϕyj1 ϕyij and the equilibrium conditions are ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ Ryi2 Ryj1 0 + = Rϕyi2 Rϕyj1 0

(3.255)

They results in the following mathematical model of the joint elements. ¨ mij yij + kij yij = Ryij where: ⎡

13 m 35 i 11 lm 210 i i 9 m 70 i 13 − 420 li mi 11 lm 210 i i 1 2 l mi 105 i 13 lm 420 i i 1 2 − 140 li mi

(3.256)

mij

⎢ ⎢ ⎢ = ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣

0 0

0 0

⎤ 13 − 420 li mi 0 0 1 2 ⎥ − 140 li mi 0 0 ⎥ 13 11 9 13 (mi + mj ) (−li mi +lj mj ) m − 420 lj mj ⎥ 35 210 70 j ⎥ 11 1 13 1 2 2 2 (−li mi +lj mj ) 105 (li mi +lj mj ) lj mj − 140 lj mj ⎥ 210 420 ⎥ 9 11 13 13 mj lj mj mj − 210 lj mj ⎦ 70 420 35 1 2 13 1 2 11 − 420 lj mj − 140 lj mj − 210 lj mj 105 lj mj (3.257)

9 m 70 i 13 lm 420 i i

DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS

223

A 6 Eli2 i i 2 EilAi

kij

⎢ ⎢ i i i i ⎢ A A A A A A A A ⎢ −129 Ei3 i −6 Ei2 i 12( Ei3 i + Ej3 j ) 6(− Ei2 i + Ej2 j ) −12 Ej3 j 6 Ej2 j ⎢ li li li lj li lj lj lj = ⎢ E A E A E A E A A A ⎢ 6 Ei2 i 2 EilAi 6(− Eli2 i + j2 j ) 4( EilAi + jl j ) −6 j2 j 2 jl j li lj lj ⎢ i i j j i ⎢ E A E A E A E A ⎢ 0 0 −12 j3 j −6 j2 j 12 j3 j −6 j2 j lj lj lj lj ⎣ Ej Aj Ej Aj Ej Aj Ej Aj 0 0 6 l2 2 l −6 l2 4 l

j j j j

⎡

A 12 Eli3 i i A 6 Eli2 i

iA 6 El2 i i 4 EilAi

iA −12 El3 i i iA −6 El2 i

0 0

0 0

⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦

(3.258)

yij = Rij =

Repetition of the described procedure to all elements of the shaft results in the mathematical model of the shaft in the plane yz. m¨ + ky = 0 y (3.261)

£

£

yi1 ϕyi1 yij ϕyij yj2 ϕyj2

Ryi1 Rϕyi1 0 0 Ryj2 Rϕyj2

¤T

(3.259) (3.260)

¤T

The geometrical interpretation of the nodal coordinates appearing in the Eq. 3.259 is given in Fig. 37.The coordinates yi , ϕyi are associated with nodes which are located

element 1 Oi node 1 node i yi ϕyi y node N element i element N-1 z

Figure 37 at the ends of the ﬁnite elements. Introduction of the external forces Since the ﬁnite element is considered elastic, the treatment of the external forces presented in the previous section can not be applied. In this case one has to take advantage of the principle of the virtual work. It says that the virtual work produced by a force Fi (see Fig. 38) on the displacement yi is equal to the virtual work produced by a set of forces along the coordinates yi1 ϕyi1 yi2 ϕyi2 . Hence ⎧ ⎫ ⎪ yi1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎬ ϕyi1 ∂Wi = Fi · yi (ai , t) = {Fi1 , Mi1 , Fi2 , Mi2 } (3.262) ⎪ yi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎭ ϕyi2

DISCRETE MODEL OF THE FREE-FREE BEAMS

224

ai 1 yi1

Fi Ei Ji Ai ρ i

z yi2

ϕ yi1

li y

Figure 38 But according to 3.241 ⎧ ³ ´2 ³ ´3 ⎪ 1 − 3 ai + 2 ai ⎪ li l ⎪ ∙ ⎪ ³ ´ ⎪ ³ ´2 ³ i ´3 ¸ ⎪ ⎪ ai ⎪ li − 2 ai + ai ⎨ li li li ³ ´2 ³ ´3 y(ai , t) = {H(ai )}T {y (t)} = ⎪ ⎪ 3 ai − 2 ai ⎪ li ⎪ ∙ ³ li ´ ⎪ ³ ´3 ¸ ⎪ 2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ − ai + ai l

li li i

2

ϕyi2

**Hence, the vector of forces along the nodal coordinates is ⎧ ³ ´2 ³ ´3 ai ai ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ∙ 1 − 3 li + 2 li ¸ ⎧ ⎪ ³ ´ ⎫ ⎪ ³ ´2 ³ ´3 ⎪ ⎪ Fi1 ⎪ ⎪ ai ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ li − 2 ai + ai ⎨ ⎨ ⎬ li li li Mi1 ³ ´2 ³ ´3 = Fi · ⎪ Fi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 3 ai − 2 ai ⎩ ⎪ ⎭ li ⎪ ∙ ³ li ´ Mi2 ⎪ ³ ´3 ¸ ⎪ 2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ − ai + ai li l l
**

i i

Introduction of the above expression into the expression for the virtual work yields ⎧ ⎫T ³ ´2 ³ ´3 ⎪ ⎪ 1 − 3 ai + 2 ai ⎪ ⎪ li l ⎪ ∙ ⎪ ⎪ ³ ´ ⎪ ⎪ ³ ´2 ³ i ´3 ¸ ⎪ ⎧ y ⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ai ai ai ⎪ li ⎪ ⎪ i1 ⎪ −2 l + l ⎨ ⎬ ⎬ ⎨ li i i ϕyi1 ³ ´2 ³ ´3 (3.264) ∂Wi = Fi · ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ yi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 3 ai − 2 ai ⎪ ⎭ ⎪ ⎩ li ⎪ ⎪ ∙ ³ li ´ ϕyi2 ⎪ ⎪ ³ ´3 ¸ ⎪ ⎪ 2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎭ − ai + ai li l l

i i

⎫T ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎧ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ yi1 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎬ ϕyi1 ⎪ ⎪ yi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ϕyi2 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭

⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭

(3.263)

⎫ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎭

(3.265)

This forces have to be introduced into the equation of motion 3.261 m¨ + ky = Fs + F(t) y (3.266)

where, similarly as before, Fs stands for the static forces and F(t) stands for the excitation forces.

y1 ϕy1 .269) yr Let us assume that the mathematical model of the beam m¨ + ky = F y is organized with respect to the above vector y of coordinates. . The instantaneous position of these supports is determine with respect to the stationary system of coordinates xyz by coordinates byi (t) . Let us denote by b vector of such coordinates. ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ yb ¨ kbb kbr yb Fb mbb mbr + = mrb mrr yr ¨ krb krr yr Fr Partitioning of the above equations results in the following set of equations ¨ ¨ mbb yb + mbr yr + kbb yb + kbr yr = Fb mrb yb + mrr yr + krb yb + krr yr = Fr ¨ ¨ (3...4 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS O Oi bxi byi x Bi yi Figure 39 ϕx i ϕy z i xi y in such a way that its upper part yb contains coordinates along which the shaft is rigidly supported and its lower part yr contains all the remaining coordinates ∙ ¸ yb y= (3.271) (3. 39).. ⎡ .270) Let us reorganize vector of coordinates of the shaft © ªT y = ϕxN . .BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 225 3.268) (3. . .272) . ⎢ ⎥ (3.yN ϕyN Let us assume that the free-free beam is rigidly supported upon several supports Bi (see Fig.267) b = ⎣ byi (t) ⎦ .. ⎤ . (3..

that the equation 3. ¨ ¨ Fb = mbb b + mbr Yr + kbb b + kbr Yr (t) 3. due to large number of the uniform sections of the element to be modeld. It follows that the size of the matrices involved in the discreet mathematical model m¨ + cy + ky = F y ˙ (3.277 is arranged in such a way that the coordinates which are to be eliminated due to the condensation procedure ye are located in the upper part of the vector y and these which are to be retained for further consideration yr are located in its lower part. ¨ ¨ mbb b + mbr yr + kbb b + kbr yr = Fb ¨ mrb b + mrr yr + krb b + krr yr = Fr ¨ (3.275) be a solution of this equation.278) y= yr Partitioning of the equations 3.272 must be replaced by b.CONDENSATION OF THE DISCREET SYSTEMS 226 Motion of the beam along the coordinates yb is determined by the boundary conditions 3. ¸ ∙ ye (3.277 yields ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ mee mer ye ¨ cee cer ye ˙ kee ker ye Fe + + = (3. In this section the procedures for reducing the size of mathematical models will be developed.267. Hence.274) mrr yr + krr yr = Fr − mrb bb − krs bb The last two terms represent the kinemetic excitation of the beam cause by motion of its supports. This solution approximate motion of the beam along the remining coordinates yr . in a general case. These interaction forces can be now determined.279) mre mrr yr ¨ cre crr yr ˙ kre krr yr Fr . the vector yb in the mathematical model 3.273) The second equation governs motion of the supported beam and can be rewritten as follows ¨ ¨ (3. is a known function of time. number of the ﬁnal elements is large too.273 represents the forces of interaction between the moving beam and its supports.277) is too large to enable the necessary analysis of the mathematical model to be carried out.276) In meny engineering problems. Let yr = Yr (t) (3. The vector Fb in the ﬁrst equation of the set 3.5 CONDENSATION OF THE DISCREET SYSTEMS (3. The vector b. Hence the above equation can be solved. Let us assume.

284) 2 Introduction of 3. 2. According to the ﬁrst criterion.280) kre krr yr 0 (3.286) .5. one may formulate the following criteria of condensation: 1. Virtual work done by all the external forces before and after condensation must be the same.1 Condensation of the inertia matrix. the inertia matrix after condensation mc must be equal to mc = hT mee h + hT mer +mre h + mrr (3. The kinetic energy of the system before condensation is ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¤ mee mer 1£ T ye ˙ T ye yr ˙ ˙ T = mre mrr yr ˙ 2 ¡ T ¢ 1 = ˙ ˙T ˙ ˙T ˙ ˙T ˙ ye mee ye + ye mer yr + yr mre ye + yr mrr yr ˙ (3. 4. if the kinetic energy after condensation is to be the same.281) (3.280 one may obtain kee ye +ker yr = 0 Therefore the sought relationship is ye = hyr where h = −k−1 ker ee To eliminate the coordinates ye from the mathematical model 3. Dissipation function of the system before and after condensation must be the same.279.283) Once the relationship is established. Potential energy of the system before and after condensation must be the same. One of many possibilities is to assume that the coordinates ye are obeyed to the static relationship. one have to determine the relationship between the coordinates ye and the coordinates yr . upon partitioning equation 3. 3.285) 2 Hence. the kinetic energy of the system before and after condensation must be the same. ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ ∙ ye 0 kee ker = (3.282) (3.CONDENSATION OF THE DISCREET SYSTEMS 227 Hence.282 yields ´ 1³ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙T ˙ ˙r ˙ [hyr ]T mee hyr + [hyr ]T mer yr + yr mre hyr +yT mrr yr ˙ T = 2 ¢ 1¡ T T = yr h mee hyr +yT hT mer yr +yT mre hyr +yT mrr yr ˙ ˙ ˙r ˙ ˙r ˙ ˙r ˙ 2 ¤ ¢ 1¡ T£ T yr h mee h + hT mer +mre h + mrr yr ˙ = ˙ (3. Kinetic energy of the system before and after condensation must be the same. 3.

289 kc = hT kee h + hT ker +kre h + krr (3.296) . according to 3. can be adopted as follows ¨ ˙ (3.5. they can be transformed as following. The virtual work performed by external forces F on the displacements y is ¸ ∙ £ T ¤ Fe T T δW = ye yr = ye Fe +yT Fr r Fr Introduction of 3. Indeed.295) mc yc +cc yc +kc yc = Fc where yc = yr The relationship 3.291) (3. hT kee h + hT ker = (−k−1 ker )T kee (−k−1 ker ) + (−k−1 ker )T ker ee ee ee −1 T −1 T = −(−kee ker ) ker + (−kee ker ) ker = 0 Hence.289) It is easy to show that sum of the ﬁrst two terms in the above expression is equal to zero.2 Condensation of the damping matrix. Since formula for the dissipation function is of the same form as formula for the kinetic energy. ¡ ¢ Fc = hT Fe +Fr (3.288) = 2 one can arrive to conclusion that the condensed stiﬀness matrix is of the form 3.283.5. according to the above consideration. Taking advantage from deﬁnition of potential energy of the system considered ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¤ kee ker 1£ T ye T ye yr V = kre krr yr 2 ¡ T ¢ 1 T T T ye kee ye + ye ker yr + yr kre ye + yr krr yr (3.4 Condensation of the external forces.282 into the above equation yields ¡ T ¢ ¡ ¢ δW = (hyr )T Fe +yT Fr = yr hT Fe +yT Fr = yT hT Fe +Fr r r r Hence.5.293) (3.294) The condensed mathematical model.282 ye = hyc permits to produce displacement along the ’cut oﬀ’ coordinates on the base of solution of the equation 3.3 Condensation of the stiﬀness matrix.287) 3.290) (3. kc = kre h + krr 3. repetition of the above derivation leads to the following deﬁnition of the condensed damping matrix cc = hT cee h + hT cer +cre h + crr (3.292) (3.295 (3.CONDENSATION OF THE DISCREET SYSTEMS 228 3.

1×10 10000 = 0.5×10−9 α = EJ = 2. O z k l y Figure 40 The exact solution of this problem is presented in page 191 for the following data E = 2.03 × 0.01 = 2.PROBLEMS 229 3. . 40.0525 k Use this data to produce the solution by means of approximation of this beam with 10 ﬁnite elements.0003m2 3 J = 0.1 × 1011 N/m2 ρ = 7800kg/m3 A = 0.01 = 0.5 × 10−9 m4 12 k = 10000N/m l = 1m 11 ×2.03×0.6 PROBLEMS Problem 52 Produce the natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes for the ﬁxed-elastically supported uniform beam shown in Fig.

41.... 0 0 ...... .. 0 .. ⎤⎡ ⎤ y1 . 0 ⎥ ⎢ ϕ1 ⎥ ⎥⎢ ⎥ . the equation of the beam supported by the spring is m¨ + ks y = 0 y This force should be introduced to the ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ 0 0 ..... ϕ1 .. ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ m¨ + ky = − ⎢ .... y y11 z ϕ11 y = {y1 . ⎥ = ⎢ ... The computed mathematical model is O y1 y2 ϕ1 ϕ2 l y Figure 41 m¨ + ky = 0..PROBLEMS 230 Solution To create the mathematical model of the free-free beam. it was divided into ten ﬁnite elements as shown in Fig..297. ϕ2 ..... 42)... 0 ⎢ 0 ⎥ ⎢ 0 0 . y11 O ϕ11 z l y -ky11 Figure 42 Therefore. ⎥ = −k1 y (3....299) ..... .298) ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎦ ⎣ y11 ⎦ k 0 0 0 ϕ11 (3.. y ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ky11 ⎦ ⎣ 0 0 .. y2 .. . ..297) The inﬂuence of the spring can be represented by the force −ky11 acting along the coordinate y11 (see Fig.... y11 . ⎥ ⎢ . ϕ11 }T (3.... 0 right hand side of the equation 3.

...300) R M O y1=0 y2 y11 ϕ11 z l y Figure 43 ϕ1=0 ϕ2 -ky11 According to the boundary conditions (see Fig. ϕ2 . ⎥ ⎥ 0 0 .303 and 3.... ..306) (3......307) (3.. 0 0 0 ... 0 ⎥ ⎥ ..302) ⎢ ⎢ ks = k + k1 = k+ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎤ 0 0 . ..301) m21 m22 y2 ¨ ks21 ks22 y2 where y1 = {y1 ... 43) y1 = {y1 ... .... .. . .304) (3... 0 0 (3. k 0 ⎦ 0 0 . y11 .304 into 3. ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ m11 m12 y1 ¨ ks11 ks12 y1 + =0 (3. M}T Introduction of 3. ϕ11 }T (3.. 0}T and R1 = {R. ϕ1 }T y2 = {y2 .PROBLEMS 231 where To introduce the boundary conditions associated with the left hand side of the beam.301 yields ∙ ¸ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ m11 m12 0 ks11 ks12 0 R1 + = y2 ¨ y2 m21 m22 ks21 ks22 0 This equation is equivalent to two equations as follows ¨ m12 y2 + ks12 y2 = R1 ¨ m22 y2 + ks22 y2 = 0 (3..303) (3.305) . let us partition the above mathematical model in such a manner that all the coordinates involved in this boundary conditions are included in the vector y1 ...... ... ϕ1 }T = {0..

PROBLEMS 232 The second equation 3. The equation 3.306 allows the vector of the interation forces R1 to be computed.4 932.307 is the equation of motion of the supported beam. 44 by boxes and in the ﬁrst column of the Table below. It was solved for the natural modes and the natural frequencies.6 357. This results are compare with natural modes (continuous line in Fig.6 0.5 129. O 2 y 1 Y1(z) Y2(z) Y3(z) l k z 0 -1 0.0 1 2 3 .8 1 -2 Figure 44 Table natural frequenciesof natural frequencies of the descreet system the continuous system [1/sec] [1/sec] 129.2 0.65 357.3 933. 44) and natural frequencies (second column in the Table) obtained by solving the continuous mathematical model ( see problem page 190). Results of this computation is shown in Fig.4 z 0.

1 2 3 a3 Z a2 sin ω t X Figure 46 The motion of these supports with respect to the inertial system of coordinate XZ is given by the following equations X1 = 0 X2 = a2 sin ωt X3 = a3 Derive expressions for : 1. 45 along coordinates x1 .308) ⎡ ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ⎤ k11 k12 k13 m14 x1 m11 m12 m13 m14 ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ m ⎥ ⎥ m22 m23 m24 ⎥ ⎥ . 2. x3 . the static deﬂection curve. x4 is as follows m¨ + kx = 0 x (3.PROBLEMS 233 Problem 53 The mathematical model of a free-free beam shown in Fig.310) .309) 1 2 3 4 x1 x2 Figure 45 x3 x4 This beam is supported upon three rigid pedestals along coordinates x1 . x2 . x2 . 46. x3 as shown in Fig. the interaction forces between the beam and the supports (3. x = ⎢ x2 ⎥ m = ⎢ 21 ⎣ k31 k32 k33 k34 ⎦ ⎣ x3 ⎦ ⎣ m31 m32 m33 m34 ⎦ m41 m42 m43 m44 k41 k42 k43 k44 x4 (3. k = ⎢ k21 k22 k23 k24 ⎥ .

m44 x4 + k44 x4 = −k43 a3 ¨ The particular solution of the equation 3.316) (3.318) ¨ x3 ¨ x3 ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 0 x1 ¨ ⎣ x2 ⎦ = ⎣ −a2 ω2 sin ωt ⎦ . m21 = m41 m42 m43 .322) (3. R1 = ⎣ R2 ⎦ .311) m11 ⎣ m21 m11 = m31 k11 ⎣ k21 k11 = k31 ⎡ or ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸∙ ¸ ∙ ¸ x1 ¨ k11 k12 x1 R1 m11 m12 + = (3. ¨ 0 x3 ¨ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ x1 0 ⎣ x2 ⎦ = ⎣ a2 sin ωt ⎦ a3 x3 ⎡ (3.PROBLEMS 234 Solution Partitioning of the equations 3.321) .323) (3.320.313) ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ k14 k12 k13 ¤ £ k22 k23 ⎦ .320) The static deﬂection is due to the time independent term −k43 a3 in the right hand side of the equation 3. k21 = k41 k42 k43 .319) or ¨ m44 x4 + k44 x4 = (m42 a2 ω 2 − k42 a2 ) sin ωt − k43 a3 (3. k22 = k44 k32 k33 k34 (3.310 results in the following equation m¨ + kx = R x where ⎡ ∙ (3.317 yields ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ¨ £ ¤ x1 ¤ x1 £ ¨ m44 x4 + k44 x4 = − m41 m42 m43 ⎣ x2 ⎦ − k41 k42 k43 ⎣ x2 ⎦ (3.317) where Introduction of boundary conditions 3.312) m21 m22 x2 ¨ k21 k22 x2 R2 ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ m12 m13 m14 £ ¤ m22 m23 ⎦ . k12 = ⎣ k24 ⎦ . x2 =x4 .308 with respect to the vector of boundary conditions 3.321 is x4 = xs k44 xs = −k43 a3 (3. R2 =0 (3.310 into the equation 3. m22 = m44 m32 m33 m34 (3. m12 = ⎣ m24 ⎦ .315) x3 R3 ¨ ¨ m11 x1 + m12 x2 + k11 x1 + k12 x2 = R1 ¨ ¨ m21 x1 + m22 x2 + k21 x1 + k22 x2 = 0 (3.314) ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ x1 R1 x1 = ⎣ x2 ⎦ .

328) (3. 47 xs = (3.324) 1 2 3 a3 4 Z xs X Figure 47 The forced response due to motion of the support 2 (X2 = a2 sin ωt) is represented by the particular solution due to the time dependant term.329) . m44 x4 + k44 x4 = (m42 a2 ω 2 − k42 a2 ) sin ωt ¨ For the above equation. the particular solution may be predicted as follows x4 = xd sin ωt (3.325) Implementation of the solution 3.325 yields the wanted amplitude of the forced vibration xd . These forces can computed from equation 3.326 into the equation 3.PROBLEMS 235 −k43 a3 k44 Its graphical representation is given in Fig.327) The resultant motion of the system considered is shown in Fig. x1= ⎣ x2 ⎦ = ⎣ −a2 ω 2 sin ωt ⎦ ¨ 0 x3 ¨ ⎡ (3. 48 1 2 3 a3 4 xs Z X a2 sinω t Figure 48 xd sinω t This motion causes interaction forces along these coordinates along which the system is attached to the base.326) (3.316. m11 x1 + m12 x2 + k11 x1 + k12 x2 = R1 ¨ ¨ In this equation x1 stands for the given boundary conditions ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ x1 0 x1 = ⎣ x2 ⎦ = ⎣ a2 sin ωt ⎦ a3 x3 ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ x1 ¨ 0 ¨ . xd = (m42 a2 ω 2 − k42 a2 ) −ω 2 m44 + k44 (3.

the wanted vector of interaction forces is as follows ⎤ 0 R1 = m11 ⎣ −a2 ω 2 sin ωt ⎦+k11 ⎣ a2 sin ωt ⎦+m12 (−xd ω2 sin ω)+k12 (xs +xd sin ωt) 0 a3 (3. known at this stage. dt2 (3.331) 0 ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ . motion of the system along the coordinate 4 ¨ ¨ x2 = x4 = xs + xd sin ωt x2 = x4 = d2 (xs + xd sin ωt) = −xd ω 2 sin ωt.PROBLEMS 236 and x2 represents.330) Hence.

Part II EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION 237 .

The transducer 5 allows the acceleration of the highest block to be measured in the horizontal direction. and 4 (see Fig.1 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE LABORATORY INSTALLATION 2 4 5 3 6 7 8 9 10 12 Figure 1 The vibrating object 2. It is furnished with the piezoelectric transducer 7 that permits the impulse of the force applied to the object to be measured. The spaces between the blocks 2 are ﬁlled in with the foam 4 in order to increase the structural damping. It consists of the three rectangular blocks 2 joint together by means of the two springs 3. The rubber tip 8 is used . The hammer 6 is used to induce vibrations of the object.Chapter 4 MODAL ANALYSIS OF A SYSTEM WITH 3 DEGREES OF FREEDOM 4. 3.1) is attached to the base 1.

x2 and x3 are shown in Fig. the acceleration of the object and the impulse of the force can be simultaneously recorded and stored in the memory of the spectrum analyzer 10.2. Magnitudes of the stuﬃness k1 .MODELLING OF THE OBJECT 239 to smooth and extend the impulse of force. 3 The diﬀerential equation of the deﬂection of the spring is EJ d2 x FH − Fz = M − Fz = 2 dz 2 (4. Hence. Both. The three independent coordinates x1 . forms a reference system for measuring its vibrations.2) (4. Motion of the blocks is restricted to one horizontal direction only. according to these assumptions. The blocks 2 are assumed to be rigid and the springs 3 are by assumption massless. EJ FH F dx = z − z2 + A dz 2 2 FH 2 F 3 EJx = z − z + Az + B 4 6 (4.1) Double integration results in the following equation of the bending line.2 MODELLING OF THE OBJECT 4. To this end let us consider one spring shown in Fig.1 Physical model x3 k3 c3 x2 k2 c2 x1 k1 c1 m1 m2 m3 Figure 2 The base 1. 4. which is considered rigid and motionless. These data allow the transfer functions to be produced and sent to the personal computer 11 for further analysis. the system can be approximated by three degrees of freedom physical model.3) . k2 and k3 of the springs can be analytically assessed.2.

**MODELLING OF THE OBJECT
**

z x(H) M=FH/2

240

F

w EJ H x F z

t

M=FH/2

Figure 3 Taking advantage of the boundary conditions associated with the lower end of the spring, one can arrived to the following expression for the bending line. ¶ µ 1 FH 2 F 3 x= (4.4) z − z EJ 4 6 Hence, the deﬂection of the upper end is ¶ µ 1 1 FH 2 F 3 x(H) = H − H = F H3 EJ 4 6 12EJ Therefore the stiﬀness of one spring is k= where 12EJ F = x(H) H3 J= (4.6)

(4.5)

wt3 (4.7) 12 Since we deal with a set of two springs between the blocks, the stiﬀness ki shown in the physical model can be computed according to the following formula. ki = 24Ei Ji Hi3 (4.8)

4.2.2 Mathematical model Application of the Newton’s equations to the developed physical model results in the following set of diﬀerential equations m1 x1 + (c1 + c2 )x1 + (−c2 )x2 + (k1 + k2 )x1 + (−k2 )x2 = F1 ¨ ˙ ˙ m2 x2 + (−c2 )x1 + (c2 + c3 )x2 + (−c3 )x3 + (−k2 )x1 + (k2 + k3 )x2 + (−k3 )x3 = F2 ¨ ˙ ˙ ˙ m3 x3 + (−c3 )x2 + c3 x3 + (−k3 )x2 + k3 x3 = F3 ¨ ˙ ˙

ANALYSIS OF THE MATHEMATICAL MODEL

241

These equations can be rewritten as following m¨ + cx + kx = F x ˙ where ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 0 0 m1 0 c1 + c2 −c2 m = ⎣ 0 m2 0 ⎦ ; c = ⎣ −c2 c2 + c3 −c3 ⎦ 0 0 m3 0 −c3 c3 ⎤ ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ ⎡ −k2 0 k1 + k2 x1 F1 k2 + k3 −k3 ⎦ ; x = ⎣ x2 ⎦ ; F = ⎣ F2 ⎦ k = ⎣ −k2 0 −k3 k3 x3 F3 ⎡ (4.9)

(4.10)

The vector F represents the external excitation that can be applied to the system. 4.3 ANALYSIS OF THE MATHEMATICAL MODEL

4.3.1 Natural frequencies and natural modes of the undamped system. The matrix of inertia and the matrix of stiﬀness can be assessed from the dimensions of the object. Hence, the natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes of the undamped system can be produced. Implementation of the particular solution x = X cos ωt into the equation of the free motion of the undamped system m¨ + kx = F x (4.12) (4.11)

Solution of the eigenvalue and eigenvector problem yields the natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes. ±ω1 , ±ω 2 , ±ω 3 (4.14) (4.15)

results in a set of the algebraic equations that are linear with respect to the vector X. ¡ 2 ¢ −ω m + k X = 0 (4.13)

Ξ = [Ξ1 , Ξ2 , Ξ2 ]

For detailed explanation see pages 102 to 105 4.3.2 Equations of motion in terms of the normal coordinates - transfer functions If one assume that the damping matrix is of the following form c =µm+κk (4.16)

the equations of motion 4.9 can be expressed in terms of the normal coordinates η = Ξ−1 x (see section normal coordinates - modal damping page 105) η n + 2ξ n ω n η n + ω 2 η n = ΞT F(t), ¨ ˙ n n n = 1, 2, 3 (4.17)

ANALYSIS OF THE MATHEMATICAL MODEL

242

The response of the system along the coordinate xp due to the harmonic excitation Fq eiωt along the coordinate xq , according to the formula 2.142 (page 107), is xp = e

iωt N X

ω2 n=1 n

Ξpn Ξqn Fq − ω2 + 2ς n ω n ωi

(4.18)

Hence the acceleration along the coordinate xp as the second derivative with respect to time, is N X Ξpn Ξqn Fq 2 iωt (4.19) xp = −ω e ¨ 2 − ω 2 + 2ς ω ωi ω n n n=1 n It follows that the transfer function between the coordinate xp and xq , according to 2.144 is Rpq (iω) = xp xp ¨ = −ω 2 = iωt Fq e Fq eiωt ¶ N X µ Ξpn Ξqn (ω2 − ω2 ) −2Ξpn Ξqn ς n ωn ωi n 2 = −ω + (ω 2 − ω2 )2 + 4ς 2 ω 2 ω2 (ω 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4ς 2 ω 2 ω2 n n n n n n n=1

q = 1, 2, 3 (4.20)

The modal damping ratios ς 1 , ς 2 and ς 3 are unknown and are to be identiﬁed by ﬁtting the analytical transfer functions into the experimental ones. Since the transducer 5 (Fig. 1) produces acceleration, the laboratory installation permits to obtain the acceleration to force transfer function. The theory on the experimental determination of the transfer functions is given in the section Experimental determination of the transfer functions (page 100). 4.3.3 Extraction of the natural frequencies and the natural modes from the transfer functions The problem of determination of the natural frequencies and the natural modes from the displacement - force transfer functions was explained in details in section Determination of natural frequencies and modes from the transfer functions (page 107). Let us do similar manipulation on the acceleration - force transfer function. First of all let us notice that µ ¶ Ξpn Ξqn (ω 2 − ω 2 ) −Ξpn Ξqn i n 2 if ω ∼ ωn Rpq (iω n ) ∼ −ω q = 1, 2, 3 (4.21) + = = 4ς 2 ω2 ω 2 2ς n ωn ω n n Since the real part of the transfer function is equal to zero for ω = ω n , its absolute value is equal to the absolute value of the imaginary part. ¯ ¯ ¯ Ξpn Ξqn ¯ ¯ q = 1, 2, 3 (4.22) |Rpq (iω n )| ∼ ¯ =¯ 2ς n ¯ ϕ = arctan Im(Rpq (iωn )) = arctan ∞ = ±90o Re(Rpq (iω n )) (4.23)

and phase ϕ for ω = ω n

EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION

243

Hence, the frequencies ω corresponding to the phase ±90o are the wanted natural frequencies ω n . Because ς n and Ξpn are constants, magnitudes of the absolute value of the transfer functions for ω = ω n represents the modes Ξ1n , Ξ2n , Ξ3n associated with the n − th natural frequency. An example of extracting the natural frequency and the corresponding natural mode from the transfer function is shown in Fig. 4

transfer functions m/N (modulus) 0.00025 0.0002 0.00015 0.0001 0.00005 0 1500 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 1500 1600 1700 1800 R(1,1) R(1,2) R(1,3) natural frequency natural mode 1600 1700 1800 frequency rad/s R(1,1) R(1,2) R(1,3)

transfer functions m/N (phase)

π/2

−π/2

frequency rad/s 2 1

Figure 4

4.4

EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION

4.4.1 Acquiring of the physical model initial parameters The physical model is determined by the following parameters m1 , m2 m3 - masses of the blocks k1 , k2 k3 - stiﬀness of the springs c1 , c2 c3 - damping coeﬃcients

.... 1..01 4.7 and 4. 1) is permanently attached to the mass m3 and the impulse can be applied along the coordinates x1 ...........8 24EJ wt3 ki = ....... x2 or x3 ..595kg The formula 4....... Alternatively the damping properties of the system can be uniquely deﬁned by means of the three modal damping ratios ς 1 .m to be measured during the laboratory session The damping coeﬃcients ci are diﬃcult to be assessed.24) allows the stiﬀness ki to be computed..m to be measured during the laboratory session H2 = .. The spectrum analyzer must show the ’waiting for trigger’ sign before the subsequent impulse is applied... To obtain a reliable result... one has to observe the following..... as the ﬁrst approximation of the damping. the laboratory installation permits the following transfer functions to be obtained..595kg m3 = 0.... Inspection of the free vibrations of the object lead to the conclusion that the damping is much smaller then the critical one..m to be measured during the laboratory session H1 = ...EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION 244 The blocks were weighted before assembly and their masses are m1 = 0....4. ς 2 and ς 3 (see equation 4... Since the transducer 5 (Fig....01 ς 2 = 0.... Hence. The following set of data is required E = 0..01 ς 2 = 0.... when applying the impulse to the object make sure that the impulse is not excessive Harder impact does not produce better results.... always place the hammer on the pad provided when it is not used 2. ξ = 1 corresponds to the critical damping.. These impulses should be applied to the middle of the block.. . 10 measurements are to be averaged to get one transfer function.....2 Measurements of the transfer functions According to the description given in section Experimental determination of the transfer functions (page 100) to produce the transfer function Rpq (iω) you have to measure response of the system along the coordinate xp due to impulse along the coordinate xq ....m to be measured during the laboratory session H3 = ..670kg m2 = 0. R31 (iω) R32 (iω) R33 (iω) (4...m to be measured during the laboratory session t = ........25) The hammer 6 should be used to introduce the impulse......17).21 × 1012 N/m2 w = . J= Hi3 12 (4........... let us adopt the following damping ratios ς 1 = 0.. As the equipment used is delicate and expensive........

w. ξ 2 . . H3 . to ﬁt the analytical transfer functions into the experimental one. m3 . E were assessed with a suﬃcient accuracy. We assume that the following parameters m1 . In this experiment. ξ 3 (4.EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION 245 4.3 Identiﬁcation of the physical model parameters In a general case. Work on one (say R33 (iω) transfer function only.26) Use the parameter t to shift the natural frequencies (increment of t results in shift of the natural frequencies to the right).27) (4. we are going to use the trial and error method. Uncertain are t.4. H1 . m2 . the identiﬁcation of a physical model parameters from the transfer functions bases on a very complicated curve ﬁtting procedures. H2 . ξ 1 . Use the parameters ξ i to align the picks of the absolute values of the transfer functions (increment in the modal damping ratio results in lowering the pick of the analytical transfer function).

01 t = ......595kg H2 = .... ξ 1 ...... Set excitation coordinate 3...WORKSHEET 246 4....... ∗ program designed by Dr..... Experimental acceleration-force transfer functions R33 (iω) Choose menu ’Frequency response measurements’ Set up the spectrum analyzer by execution of the sub-menu ’Setup analyzer’ Choose sub-menu ’Perform measurement’.... T..m of mode 2 springs damping ratio thickness of the ξ 3 = 0.m 1 1 Mass of the block length of the spring m2 = 0.... ξ 3 in the input data............ By varying t............. 2.. Initial parameters of physical model Measure the missing parameters and insert them to the table below Mass of the block length of the spring m1 = 0..m 2 2 Mass of the block length of the spring m1 = 0..595kg H3 = .m 3 3 damping ratio Young’s ξ 1 = 0. response coordinate 3.. execute it and apply 10 times impulse along the coordinates 3 Choose sub-menu ’Time/Frequency domain toggle’ to see the measured transfer function Choose sub-menu ’Transfer TRF to computer’ and execute it Exit menu ’Frequency response measurements’ Choose ’Response display/plot’ to display the transfer functions 3...670kg H1 = ......... Chalko ... Save the initial data. Use the parameter t to shift the natural frequencies (increment of t results in shift of the natural frequencies to the right)... Use the parameters ξ i to align the picks of the absolute values of the transfer functions (increment in the modal damping ratio results in lowering the pick of the analytical transfer function).01 w = ...... ξ 2 .....m of mode 3 springs ∗ Run program ’Prac3 ’ and choose menu ’Input data’ to enter the above data. try to ﬁt the analytical data into the experimental one...5 WORKSHEET 1.....21 × 1012 N/m2 of mode 1 modulus damping ratio width of the ξ 2 = 0. Identiﬁcation of the thickness t and the modal damping ratios ξ i You can see both the experimental and analytical transfer function R33 (iω).01 E = 0....

........01 w = ..m of mode 2 springs damping ratio thickness of the ξ 3 = 0...............................................595kg H3 = ............ 2 ....................595kg H2 = .......... Conclusions .WORKSHEET 247 Record the identiﬁed parameters in the following table Mass of the block length of the spring m1 = 0.... 3 ...670kg H1 = .......01 E = 0.... .................01 t = .m 3 3 damping ratio Young’s ξ 1 = 0... Natural frequencies and the corresponding natural modes Choose menu ’Mode shapes display/plot’ to produce the analytical frequencies and modes Plot the natural modes From plots of the experimental transfer functions R31 (iω)...........................m 1 1 Mass of the block length of the spring m2 = 0............. R33 (iω) determine the natural frequencies and the natural modes Insert the experimental and analytical frequencies into the table below natural frequency analytical experimental natural frequency natural frequency 1 ... .............. Plot the analytical and the experimental transfer function R33 (iω) 4...m of mode 3 springs Save the identiﬁed parameters........m 2 2 Mass of the block length of the spring m1 = 0... . Experimental and analytical transfer functions R31 (iω) and R32 (iω) Choose menu ’Input data’ and set the excitation coordinate to 1 and the response coordinate to 3 Repeat all steps of the section 2 Plot the transfer function R31 (iω) Choose menu ’Input data’ and set the excitation coordinate to 2 and the response coordinate to 3 Repeat all steps of the section 2 Plot the transfer function R32 (iω) 5.....21 × 1012 N/m2 of mode 1 modulus damping ratio width of the ξ 2 = 0...................................... 6.. R32 (iω)....

Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

We've moved you to where you read on your other device.

Get the full title to continue

Get the full title to continue listening from where you left off, or restart the preview.

scribd